Liren Large Software Subsidy 14/14.iso/s/s005/14.ddi/REQUIRED/OS2_HELP_WPHELP.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1993-04-29 | 353.9 KB | 12,522 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Help for System Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the objects in the System Setup folder to specify your own settings for
options such as colors, fonts, mouse and keyboard controls, country support,
and the system time.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Help for Sound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Sound to indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is
displayed or an invalid key is pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Help for Sound Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Warning beep to change the current setting. A checkmark next to Warning
beep indicates that the beep is set on. If the check box is not selected, the
beep is off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Help for Shredder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Shredder to permanently delete an object. If you drag an object to the
shredder, you receive a warning message that the object is about to be
discarded.

Note:   You can suppress the confirmation messages by removing the check marks
        from the checkboxes in the Confirmations page of the System object
        settings notebook.

If you inadvertently delete an object, it is sometimes possible to recover it.
For more information, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Recovering deleted or erased files
o Confirming delete actions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Help for System Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use System Setup to display the contents of the System Setup folder.

Use the objects in the System Setup folder to specify your own settings for
options such as colors, fonts, mouse and keyboard controls, country support,
and the system time. Double-click on the folder object to display the objects
contained in it.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Help for Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A folder is an object that contains other objects.  A folder can be used to
organize objects such as program objects and data-file objects. For example,
you can organize your letters (represented by objects) in a particular folder.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select OK to send any changed information to the program and close the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cancel if you decide not to change the current settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Undo to change the settings to those that were active before this window
was displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Default to change the settings to those that were active when you
installed the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Open to open an object (such as a program object or folder object) and
either start the program or display its contents. Selecting Open is the same as
double-clicking on the object.

If you select the arrow to the right of Open, a pop-up menu appears that
enables you to choose the view in which you want to display the object.  For
example, for a folder you can select Icon view, Tree view, Settings, or Details
view.  Icon view arranges the objects randomly within the folder. Tree view
displays the objects in a hierarchy.  Settings enables you to view or change
the current settings of the object. Details view displays the properties of the
objects (for example, the date and time created, the full name, and any special
attributes).

Note:   Data-file objects are displayed in an additional view, pre-associated
        to the System Editor program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Help for Icon, Tree, Settings and Details Views ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Icon view arranges the objects randomly within the folder. Tree view displays
the objects in a hierarchy.  Settings enables you to view or change the current
settings of the object. Details view displays the properties of the objects
(for example, the date and time created, the full name, and any special
attributes).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Open to display the contents of the selected object in its default view.
For example, if you select Open from the pop-up menu for Mouse, the preselected
view, Settings, appears.  If you select Open on a data-file object, the object
is displayed in the program it is associated with.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Sort to specify in what order the contents of a folder appear.  All objects
in a folder are sorted by name (by default) and object type.  You also can sort
by specified attributes.

If you select the arrow to the right of Sort, a pop-up menu appears that
displays additional choices for sorting the folder contents.  You can specify
additional items to be added to the Sort menu by selecting them in the Sort by
attribute field on the Sort page in the Settings notebook of the folder.  For
example, if you want to sort data-file objects by Last write date, select it in
the Sort by attribute list on the Sort page.  Last write date is added to the
pop-up menu so that you can select it as a sort criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Refresh to update changed folder information to its current status.

This choice is available only for folders whose contents can change
independently (for example, diskette folders or LAN folders).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Help for Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Settings to view or change the current properties of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create another to create an object that has default settings and data.  The
Create another choice has a cascaded menu.  If you select Create another from
the pop-up menu of an object, a default object is created.  If you select the
arrow to the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed.  This menu
contains a listing of all the template objects you have created.  You can
select one of the choices to create another object from that template.

For example, suppose you created a "Company letterhead" template.  This
template would be listed as a choice on the cascaded menu.  Whenever you need
to create a similar letter, you could select Company letterhead from the
cascaded menu. The new letter (data-file object) would contain whatever was in
the "Company letterhead" original, and it would have its associations.

This choice is similar to that of dragging a template from the Templates
folder.

Related Information:

Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another - Open Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create another object to an open folder:

 1. Type a new name for the new object.
 2. Select a folder to create the object to.
 3. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create to create another object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another - Related Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create another object to a related folder (near its current tree position):

 1. Type a new name for the object.
 2. Select a folder to create another object to. (Expand or collapse the view
    by selecting the plus or minus sign next to a folder.)
 3. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another - Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create another object to a folder on the Desktop:

 1. Select a folder to create another object to, or expand the collapsed view
    of the contents of a folder by selecting the plus sign next to the folder;
    then select the folder object you want.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another - Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create another object to a particular drive or folder on a drive object:

 1. Select a drive icon to put the object in, or expand the collapsed view of
    the contents of the drive by selecting the plus sign next to the drive
    object; then select the folder you want.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create another object to a particular directory:

 1. Type a new name for the object.
 2. Type the path of the folder you want to create another object to.
 3. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy to make a duplicate of the selected object (including a folder) and
its contents.

You can copy the selected object in several ways:

o To a folder on the Desktop
o To any of your open folders
o To a related folder
o To a particular drive
o To a folder using a path statement.

Related Information:

o Considerations when copying and moving file or data-file objects
o Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy - Open Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the object to an open folder:

 1. Type a new name for the duplicate object.
 2. Select a folder to copy the object to.
 3. Select Copy.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Copy
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy to duplicate the selected object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy - Related Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the selected object to a related folder (near its current tree
position):

 1. Type a new name for the duplicate object.
 2. Select a folder to copy the object to.  (Expand or collapse the view by
    selecting the plus or minus sign next to a folder.)
 3. Select Copy.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Copy
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy - Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the selected object to a folder on the Desktop:

 1. Select a folder to copy the object to, or expand the collapsed view of the
    contents of a folder by selecting the plus sign next to the folder; then
    select the folder object you want.
 2. Select Copy.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Copy
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy - Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the selected object to a particular drive or folder on a drive object:

 1. Select a drive icon to put the copy in, or expand the collapsed view of the
    contents of the drive by selecting the plus sign next to the drive object;
    then select the folder you want.
 2. Select Copy.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Copy
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the selected object to a particular directory:

 1. Type a new name for the duplicate object.
 2. Type the path of the folder you want to copy the object to.
 3. Select Copy.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Copy
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Help for Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can move the selected object to a new location in several ways:

o To a folder on the Desktop
o To any of your open folders
o To a related folder
o To a particular drive
o To a folder using a path statement.

Related Information:

Considerations when copying and moving file and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Move to relocate the selected object to another folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move - Open Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the object to an open folder:

 1. If you want to rename the selected object, type a new name.
 2. Select a folder to move the selected object to.
 3. Select Move.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Move
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move - Related Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the selected object to a related folder (near its current tree
position):

 1. If you want to rename the selected object, type a new name.
 2. Select a folder to move the object to. (Expand or collapse the view by
    selecting the plus or minus sign next to a folder.)
 3. Select Move.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Move
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move - Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the selected object to a folder on the Desktop:

 1. If you want to rename the selected object, type a new name.
 2. Select a folder to move the object to, or expand the collapsed view of the
    contents of a folder by selecting the plus sign next to the folder; then
    select the folder you want.
 3. Select Move.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Move
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move - Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the selected object to a particular drive or folder on a drive object:

 1. If you want to rename the selected object, type a new name.
 2. Select a drive icon you want to move the object to, or expand the collapsed
    view of the contents of the drive by selecting the plus sign next to the
    drive object; then select the folder object you want.
 3. Select Move.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Move
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Move - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the selected object to a particular directory:

 1. To rename the selected object, type a new name.
 2. Type the path of the folder you want to move the object to.
 3. Select Move.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Move
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Help for Create Shadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create shadow to create a new object that represents the original of an
object and its contents.

This choice differs from Copy because the original and the copy do not
automatically exchange data, but a shadow does.  In effect, a shadow works with
its original, while a copy works independently.  An action done to a shadow
(for example, a name change) occurs in the original as well.  The exceptions
are move and delete.

The Create shadow choice is useful because you can access data-file objects or
program objects that are on other physical devices; for example, a second hard
disk, without physically moving the data-file or program object to your primary
hard disk (where your desktop is located).

Related Information:

Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create to make a shadow copy of an object that has a link to the
selected object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow - Open Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can make a shadow copy of the selected object in several ways:

o To a folder on the Desktop
o To any of your open folders (the destination folder must be previously
  opened).
o To a related folder
o To a particular drive
o To a folder using a path statement.

To copy the object to an open folder:

 1. Select a folder to copy the object to.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow - Related Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a shadow copy of the selected object in a related folder:

 1. Select a folder to copy the object to. (Expand or collapse the view by
    selecting the plus or minus sign next to a folder.)
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow - Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make a shadow copy of the selected object in one of the folders on the
Desktop:

 1. Select a folder to copy the object to, or expand the collapsed view of the
    contents of a folder by selecting the plus sign next to the folder; then
    select the folder you want.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow - Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make a shadow copy of the selected object on a particular drive or folder on
a drive object:

 1. Select a drive icon you want to copy the object to, or expand the collapsed
    view of the contents of the drive by selecting the plus sign next to the
    drive object; then select the folder object you want.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make a shadow copy of the selected object in a particular directory:

 1. Type the path of the folder you want to copy the object to.
 2. Select Create.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Create
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Delete to discard selected objects.  Before you delete an object, consider
that you might not be able to recover it. If you select Delete, a window
appears that enables you to specify whether or not you want to receive a
confirmation message prior to deleting objects. If you prefer to suppress these
messages, select Confirming delete messages below.

Note:   If you delete an object by mistake, you might be able to recover it.
        For more information, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Recovering deleted or erased objects
o Confirming delete actions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for From ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Location field indicates the descriptive name or location of the folder
that contains the objects you want to delete. The Object field lists the
selected objects.

Note:   If you do not want all the objects deleted, you can deselect those that
        you do not want deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to receive a warning message when the selected objects
are about to be discarded.  The message asks you to confirm that you want to
discard the objects.

Note:   If you prefer to suppress these messages, select Confirming delete
        messages below.

Related Information:

Confirming delete actions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Folder Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to receive a warning message when the objects within
other objects are about to be discarded.  The message asks you to confirm that
you want to discard the objects.

Note:   If you prefer to suppress these messages, select Confirming delete
        messages below.

Related Information:

Confirming delete actions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to discard the selected objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to delete objects.  If the objects that are listed in the
Object list box are correct, select Delete to discard them.

Check marks in the confirmation check boxes indicate that you will receive
warning messages prior to discarding. If you receive messages about confirming
the deletion, respond to them.  If you prefer to suppress these messages,
select Confirming delete messages below.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o From
o Confirm on delete
o Confirm on folder delete
o Delete

Note:   If you delete an object by mistake, you might be able to recover it.
        Select Recovering deleted or erased files below.

Related Information:

o Recovering deleted or erased objects
o Confirming delete actions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Help for Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Find to search for any objects such as data-file objects, folder objects,
device objects, and printer objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Print to send the contents of the selected objects to the default printer
object.  If you select the arrow to the right of Print, a pop-up menu appears
enabling you to select a print object other than your default print object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Help for Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Select to display a pop-up menu for choosing the type of selection you
want. Select all selects every object in the folder and Deselect all cancels
the Select all choice.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Selecting more than one object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Help for Arrange ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Arrange to organize the objects in any open folder.  If you select Arrange
from the Desktop folder pop-up menu, all objects are automatically arranged on
the screen.

This choice is available only if the folder was opened in icon view.

Related Information:

Opening a folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Help and use the choices in the Help menu to
display:

o An index of references to help topics
o General information about the object
o A list and description of keys you can use
o General information about the help facility
o Product information for this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Help for Lock Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Lock disk to restrict access to an unlocked drive.  You can lock the drive
when it is empty or when it contains a type of medium, such as a diskette or an
optical disc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Help for Eject Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Eject disk to remove a type of medium, such as a diskette or an optical
disc from an unlocked drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Help for Unlock Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Unlock disk to access a locked drive.  You can unlock the drive when it is
empty or when it contains a type of medium, such as a diskette or an optical
disc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Help for Mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Mouse to set up your mouse for left-hand or right-hand use. You can also
change the preset timing and mouse button settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Double-Click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to adjust the mouse double-click rate. The double-click rate is
the maximum amount of time that can elapse between two clicks of mouse button
1, and still have the system recognize the action as a double-click.  Drag the
slider arm to the left to decrease the rate, or to the right to increase it.
Select a slider button to increase or decrease the rate in increments.

To check the rate, move the mouse pointer to Test here and double-click.  If
the double-click is performed within the rate set, the Test here field will
change color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Tracking Speed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to adjust the speed with which the mouse movement on a surface
is reflected on the screen.  Drag the slider arm to the left to decrease the
rate, or to the right to increase the rate.  Select a slider button to increase
or decrease the rate in increments.  To check the speed, move your mouse on a
surface and watch the pointer move on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Test Here ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to test the double-click rate of the mouse.

Move the mouse pointer to the field and double-click. If the double-click rate
is performed to the rate set (slow to fast), the Test here field will change
color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Timing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Setting the timing affects how quickly actions occur when you press mouse
buttons or move your mouse.

To change any of the current settings, drag the slider arm, or select the
slider button.

Test the double-click rate of the mouse using the Test here field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Double-click
o Tracking speed
o Test here
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Right-Handed, Left-Handed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the titled picture to indicate if your mouse should be set up for
left-hand use or right-hand use.

Initially the mouse is set up for right-hand use, which means that the left
button is called button 1.  If you select the Left-handed picture, then the
right button is called button 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Setup window describes the type of mouse setup you want.  Select the titled
picture to indicate if your mouse should be set up for left-hand use or
right-hand use.  The changes take effect immediately.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Right-Handed, Left-Handed
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Displaying Pop-up Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to change the setting for displaying pop-up menus.

To change the setting, select Button 1  or Button 2 and Single-click or
Double-click to indicate the mouse action.  If you want the setting to include
a key combination in addition to the mouse combination, select one or more
keys; Ctrl, Shift, or Alt.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Displaying Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to change the button used to display the Window List. To change
the current setting, select a radio button.

Note:   If you change the default setting, you also need to change the default
        setting (button 2), which is defined to display pop-up menus.

Related Information:

Displaying the Window List


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Dragging Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to change the button for direct-manipulation tasks, such as
dragging an object to a folder.

To change the setting, select Button 1 or Button 2 to indicate the mouse
action.  If you want the setting to include a key combination in addition to
the mouse combination, select one or more keys; Ctrl, Shift, or Alt.

Related Information:

Dragging an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Editing Title Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to change the button for changing the names of objects and title
bars.

To change the setting, select Button 1 or Button 2 and Single-click or
Double-click to indicate the mouse action.  If you want the setting to include
a key combination in addition to the mouse combination, select one or more
keys; Ctrl, Shift, or Alt.

Related Information:

Changing Titles


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Mappings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mouse mappings, or settings, enable you to change the settings to whatever you
prefer; however, if you change the settings and then refer to help information
from elsewhere in the system, the information describes the initial settings.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Dragging objects
o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Editing title text
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Help for Country ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Country to set up your system with all or some formats and characters used
for the date, time, numbers, and currency of a specific country.

When you installed the operating system, your system was set up for a specific
country.  If you ever want to specify a different country, you can use the
Country object to enable Presentation Manager* (PM) programs to use a new
format; however, if your programs are other than PM, you must use the
installation diskettes to reconfigure your system.  For more information,
select Adding options after installation below.

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Country ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the down arrow to list the country names you can choose from.  If you do
not find the country you want, select Other country.  If you select a country,
all the formats for that country are reflected in the settings.

If you receive the message

The country is not valid for
the current code pages
 you might have to change the COUNTRY, DEVINFO, and CODEPAGE statements in your
CONFIG.SYS file.  If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can
select a command name below to link to the information in the Command
Reference.  If you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding
online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o COUNTRY
o DEVINFO
o CODEPAGE
o Adding online documentation after installation
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Measurement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the measurement system commonly used by the selected country.
To change the measurement, select the down arrow, then select one of the
following:

Inches           A unit 1/36 yard to measure size of type
Centimeters      A unit approximately 0.39 inch to measure size of type
Points           A unit 1/72 inch to measure size of type
Picas            A unit 1/6 inch to measure size of type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for List Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to change the character used to separate numbers in a series
(for example,  1000, 250, 5740). Select the down arrow to change the character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Country ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a country to set up your system with the formats and characters used for
the:

o date

o time

o numbers of the selected country.

The format is automatically reflected in the measurement field, and fields
throughout the country notebook pages.

Select a notebook tab to change specific formats.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Country
o Measurement
o List separator
o Undo
o Default

For information about keyboard layouts for specific countries, refer to
Keyboards and Code Pages.  You can obtain this book by mailing in the request
card found in the OS/2* 2.1 operating system package.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the radio buttons to display the date in a specific order.

Note:   Only Presentation Manager* programs are capable of displaying the date
        in a different order.  For example, you will see the changed date order
        in the System Clock and in the Details View of a folder.  However, you
        will not see the changed order for a date if you type the Date command
        in a DOS window.  Command-prompt sessions, such as a DOS window, cannot
        display the changed order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the arrows to select the character used to separate the parts of the date
(such as a slash).  For example, if you selected a slash, the date would be
displayed as: 06/27/82.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the radio buttons to change the specific order for displaying the
date.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Date order
o Separator
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Hours to set the system clock to display 12 hours or 24 hours.

If you select a 12-hour clock, 11:59 a.m. is one minute before noon, and 11:59
p.m. is one minute before midnight.  If you select a 24-hour clock, 11:59 is
one minute before noon, and 23:59 is one minute before midnight.

For a 12-hour clock, you can select the abbreviations for before and after noon
(for example, am instead of AM). Use the spin button to make the selection.

To see the time currently set on the system clock, display the clock object, or
type time at an OS/2 full screen or window command prompt.

Related Information:

Setting the clock


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to change the character used to separate the minutes from the
seconds (for example, a period).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the radio buttons to show the time for a 12-hour or 24-hour
clock.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Hours
o Separator
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for 1000 Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to change the character used to separate the parts of a
number.  For example, if you select a comma, 1000 would be shown as 1,000.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Decimal Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to change the character used to separate the decimal from the
whole number (for example, 4.5).  If you select a comma, four and one-half
would be shown as 4,5.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Currency Format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows in the Symbol spin button to change the characters that
represent the abbreviation used as the currency symbol (for example, Fr).

Select Prefix to specify that the character in the symbol field is to precede
the currency amount, or Suffix to specify that the character is to follow the
currency amount.

Select the Intervening space check box to specify that a space is required
between the currency symbol and the amount.

Select Leading zero check box to specify that a 0 is to precede decimal
fractions.  For example, if you set Leading zero on, one-half would be shown as
0.5.  Select Leading zero again to change the current setting.

Select the arrows in the Decimal digits spin button to specify the number of
digits that are to represent decimal fractions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Numbers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the number formats you prefer.  As you make changes, the new format is
reflected in the Samples box.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o 1000 separator
o Decimal separator
o Currency format
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create a Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a new printer object on your desktop:

 1. Type a new name in the Name field for the printer (for example, "My New
    Printer").
 2. Select a printer driver from the Default printer driver field.  If the
    printer driver you need is not listed in the field, select the Install new
    printer driver push button (or display the pop-up menu for any of the
    objects in the field; then select Install).  A window appears in which you
    install the printer driver you need as the default.
 3. Accept the preselected port object or select a port object in the Output
    port field or select Output to file.
 4. Select Create.  A new printer object is created.  You might need to
    customize the printer properties information (for example, change the form
    size).  For more information, select Changing settings of objects below.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Name
o Default printer driver
o Output port
o Output to file
o Install new printer driver
o Create
o Cancel

Related Information:

Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field displays the description that appears beneath this printer
object.  You can use the name that appears in this field, or you can type a new
one.  The field allows up to 47 characters and scrolls horizontally.  To avoid
confusion, use a different name for each printer object on your desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Output Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the ports available on your computer.  The next available
port is preselected.  You can select a different port.  Scroll the list to see
more ports.

If you select more than one port, you pool printers.  This enables the printer
object to route jobs through more than one port.  If you select a port that has
a striped background, indicating another printer object already uses it, both
printer objects route jobs to that port.

To change the configuration for a serial port, or timeout period for a parallel
port, display its pop-up menu, and then select Settings.

For a detailed description of each type of port, select Printer port types from
the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Printer port types
o Selecting more than one object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Installing printer ports


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Output to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the check box to indicate that you want this printer object to store
your print job as a printable file, rather than route it to a printer or
plotter.  When you direct your program to print at a printer object that has
Output to file selected, a window appears in which you type the file name for
your print job.

Note:   Only OS/2 Presentation Manager programs can use the print to file
        feature.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Printer Port Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A printer or plotter connects to a port at the back of the computer.

Parallel
          Any port name beginning with the letters LPT identifies a parallel
          port, which is the type of port most printers require.  If this is
          the first printer you have installed, LPT1 is the preselected choice.
Serial
          Any port name beginning with the letters COM identifies a serial, or
          communications, port.

Check your printer or plotter documentation to determine which type of port
(parallel or serial) your device uses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create to record the name and port for this new printer object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use a printer object as a place to drop off documents you want printed.

Your desktop can have more than one printer object, each representing a
different printer.

You can also have more than one printer object for a single printer, each
having a different printer setup.  For example, you might have one printer
object representing your printer set up for printing on letter size paper, and
another printer object representing the same printer set up to print envelopes.

Double-click on the printer object to display the jobs waiting to print.

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Viewing print-job information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window contains information about the status of your printer object and
the status of its jobs.

Display the printer-object pop-up menu to hold or release the printer object,
or to refresh the print job information, particularly for a printer or plotter
that is connected to a network.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Status
o Print jobs

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the current condition of the printer object.  The possible
Status messages are:

xx Jobs
          Normal conditions - xx is replaced by the number of jobs waiting to
          print.
xx Jobs - processing held
          The printer object is not printing jobs.
xx Jobs - deletion pending
          You have deleted the printer object while a job is printing. As soon
          as the job is printed, the printer object and the remaining jobs for
          that particular printer object will be deleted.
Jobs printed directly - spooler disabled.
          You have disabled the spooler, which causes jobs to print immediately
          rather than wait at a printer object.

Related Information:

o Holding or releasing a printer
o Enabling the spooler


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains jobs waiting to print at the printer object named in the
title.  In the Icon view, a job's icon indicates its status.  Alternatively,
you can select Detail view, which displays date, time, status, and job
identifier.

The first job listed prints next.  Display the pop-up menu of a job if you want
to hold, release, restart, copy, or print that job next.

Display the pop-up menu of the printer object to refresh print-job information.
(For a network printer, print-job information is also refreshed automatically
at specified intervals.)

For a network printer object, this list might show all print jobs, or only your
own print jobs.  To learn how to change the remote job view, select Changing
the print job view from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Print-job status messages
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing print-job information
o Changing the network job view
o Changing the refresh interval


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print-Job Status Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Job status field describes whether the job is printing, or any reason the
job cannot print.  This field can show any of the following messages:

Waiting in queue
          The job can print when it reaches the front of the print queue.
Job held
          Hold is selected for this job.  When you are ready for the job to
          print, display its pop-up menu; then select Release.
Printing
          The printer is currently printing the job.
Job spooling
          The job is being spooled.
Error
          Some condition prevents the job from printing.  To learn how to view
          the error condition, select Viewing print-job status from the
          "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Viewing print-job status
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create another to create a printer object that has the same settings as the
original, but a different port.

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Configuring printer properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy to create a printer object with the same settings as the original,
including the port.

Note:   You cannot copy a printer object that represents a network printer or
        plotter, but you can move the object onto your desktop for convenience
        in dropping jobs you want to print remotely.

 Related Information:

o Moving an object
o Changing settings of objects
 **and res=15712.Help for Delete Message and ** res=15713.Help for Delete
(button on message), ** res=15714.Help for Cancel (button on message)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete All Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Delete all jobs to clear the printer object of all pending jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Open to choose any of the following views:

Detail
          Displays details of each job waiting to print, including the job
          name, document name, submission date, submission time, status, and
          submitter.
Icon
          Displays each job as a picture representing a document, graphic, or
          other printable item.
Settings
          Displays the tabbed windows describing view, printer driver, output
          ports, and other setup information for this printer object.

Select Open, rather than the arrow, to display the default view.

Related Information:

Changing the print-job view


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Change status to hold a printer object, and to
release it again.

Use Hold to prevent all jobs waiting to print at this printer object from
printing.  For example, you would use Hold if you need to stop the printer to
change paper or make other adjustments.

Note:   It is also recommended that you hold all printer objects before
        installing a printer driver.

 Use Release to cancel a hold action for this printer object.  Any job (that is
not held individually) can then print.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Set Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Set default to select a default printer object
for your system.  A cascaded menu appears that contains a list of all your
printer objects.  The printer object currently selected as the default for your
entire system has a check mark next to it in this list.  The system routes a
print job to this default when no other printer object is selected for the job.

Often, the program or command you use to create a print job enables you to
specify a printer for that job.  You can also individually select a default
printer object for each folder and object on your desktop.  Set default enables
you to select one printer object to cover all other situations.

The first printer object created on your desktop becomes the default until you
select another printer object from the Set default cascaded menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Refresh to obtain the most recent information about your print jobs.

The list also refreshes automatically.  If the printer object represents a
printer that is directly connected to your system, the list refreshes whenever
the status of a job changes.  For a network printer object, the list refreshes
at preset time intervals.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This print job represents a document or other object submitted for printing.
The program submitting the job can set job properties, or settings.

Display the pop-up menu if you want to hold, release, restart, copy, or print
this job next.  You can also change some of the settings while the job waits to
print.

Related Information:

o Changing print-job priority
o Viewing print-job information
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy to create a print job having the same contents and properties as the
selected job.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Delete to remove a selected job or jobs from the printer object, canceling
the print request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Open to choose one of these views of a
selected job:

Job content
          Displays the contents of the document.
Settings
          Displays job properties, such as number of copies, job priority, and
          job status.  You can change some of these properties while the job
          waits to print.  You cannot view or change settings for a job that is
          currently printing.

Selecting Open, rather than the arrow, displays job content.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Start Again ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Start again while a job is printing to begin printing from page 1 again.
For example, if the paper jams during printing, you can use Start again to
restart your job.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Next ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Print next to have this job print ahead of all the other jobs waiting to
print at this printer object.  The current job completes printing; then the job
selected to Print next is printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Change status to display an additional pop-up
menu with choices that let you hold a print job, and release it.

Use Hold to prevent this job from printing.

Use Release to cancel a hold action for this print job.  The job can then print
when it reaches the front of the queue, as long as you have not also selected
Hold on the pop-up menu of the printer object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to set up how your print jobs are displayed.  Print-job
information is displayed when you select this printer object.  You can also see
the system name assigned to the printer object queue, in case you have a
program that identifies the printer object by this name.

In the Default View field, you can preset the view type to display pictures
(icons) or textual information (details).

If the printer object represents a printer or plotter connected to a network,
use the Network Job View field to indicate whose jobs (your own, or every job
at the same network printer object) you want displayed.  Use the Refresh
interval field if you need to change how often the system refreshes network
print-job status.

The changes you make do not take effect until you view another notebook page or
close the printer object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Default View
o Physical name
o Network Job View
o Refresh interval
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Physical Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Physical name field shows the system name assigned to the printer object.
Some programs refer to this as the name of the printer queue.  Use this field
to identify the printer object if your program does not list printer objects by
their longer description.

You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a radio button to indicate how you would like your jobs to look when you
check print-job information for this printer object.  Select Detail if you want
to see a line of text giving details of each print job, such as the job name,
document name, submission date, submission time, status, and submitter.  The
preselected choice, Icon, causes each job to appear as a picture representing a
document, graphic, or other printable item.

Related Information:

Viewing print jobs and printer status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Job View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field for a network printer object to indicate which jobs you want
shown when you display print-job status information.  The preselected choice,
Show all jobs, enables you to display information about all the jobs waiting to
print.  Select the Show own jobs radio button to indicate you want to display
only information about your own jobs at this network printer object.

Related Information:

Viewing print jobs and printer status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Output page shows the ports selected for the printer object.  You can
select a different port (or more than one port) to route print jobs.  You also
use the Output page to set up a printer object that saves your print job as a
printable file rather than routing it to a port.

You also can redirect output to a COM port; however, you cannot redirect output
from a COM port to a LPT port.  The redirection option is only available when
two or more printer objects are defined.  For more information, select Printing
to a COM Port from "Related Information."

If you select a port in this window, you can change serial communications
setup, parallel port settings.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Output port
o Output to file
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Printing to a COM port
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Output Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of the ports available on your computer.  Scroll the
list to see more ports.  This printer object forwards job output to the
selected port.  If this field has more than one selected port, the printer
object has pooled printers and can route jobs through more than one port.

You can select a different port or additional ports.  If you select a port that
has a striped background, indicating another printer object already uses it,
both printer objects route jobs to that port.

If you select a port in this field, you can change serial communications setup,
parallel port settings.  For a detailed description of each type of port,
select Printer port types from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Pooled printers, description of
o Printer port types
o Selecting more than one object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This port object represents the connection between your printer or plotter and
your computer.

Select this port to change its serial communications setup or parallel port
settings.

Related Information:

Printer port types


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window shows the selected printer drivers and the default driver used to
print at this printer object.  You can change your selections or make a
different driver the default driver.  Select Job properties to set up default
print job requirements, such as paper size or resolution.  The changes you make
do not take effect until after you view another notebook page or close the
printer object.

Whenever you change the physical setup of your printer, such as changing the
size of the paper in the printer, you must also change the printer properties
of the appropriate printer driver in this window.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Printer driver
o Default printer driver
o Job properties
o Undo

Related Information:

o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Job properties, description of
o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the printer drivers currently installed on your system.  If
this field does not have the printer driver you need for your model printer,
select Installing printer drivers from the "Related Information" list below.

You can select one or more drivers for this printer object or you can change
the selection.  Scroll the field to see more drivers.

Display the pop-up menu of a driver to view or change its printer properties.
Printer-property settings must match the physical setup of the printer.

Note:   Each time you change forms on a printer, you must return to this window
        and change the printer properties of the driver to the correct form
        name.

Related Information:

o Installing printer drivers
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Changing the default printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This object represents the printer driver for a particular printer.  Display
the pop-up menu to set up printer properties describing the physical setup of
the printer, or to install another printer driver.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Viewing printer-driver models and fonts
o Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default printer driver field shows the printer drivers associated (by
selection in the Printer driver field) with this printer object.  One driver in
the field is selected as the default driver, which the printer object uses as
its printer driver.

The preselected choice in this field is the last printer driver you install, or
the same driver used as default by other printer objects.  You can select a
different driver as the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this push button to set default job properties (such as orientation and
number of copies) used when a program does not specify them.  The properties
you set apply only to the printer driver selected in the Default printer driver
field.

Related Information:

Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to choose a queue driver for this particular printer object.
You also use this window to indicate that you want to store print jobs in a
printer-specific file (for example, if you print on a system that does not run
the OS/2* operating system).  The changes you make in this window do not take
effect until after you view another notebook page or close the printer object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Queue driver
o Job dialog before print
o Printer-specific format
o Print while spooling
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Installing queue drivers
o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains all the queue drivers installed on your system.  Normally,
you select PMPRINT, even if the printer object represents a plotter.

If you install other queue drivers, you can scroll the field to see them.  For
example, after you install the PMPLOT queue driver, you can select it in this
field to achieve reverse clipping while plotting.

Related Information:

o Installing queue drivers
o Enabling reverse clipping


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer-Specific Format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Printer-specific format check box to create jobs in a format that
only a specific type of printer can print correctly.  For example, select this
field if you use a printer that is not directly connected to your system and
does not run the OS/2* operating system or recognize Presentation Manager*
drivers.

The system automatically selects Printer-specific format for a network printer
if the network server does not support Presentation Manager drivers.

Note:   Printer-specific format jobs take much more storage than
        printer-independent jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print While Spooling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Print while spooling check box if you want a printer-specific format
job to begin printing immediately.  The spooler will release the beginning of
the job to the printer without waiting to receive the end of the job from your
program.

Note:   A network printer object does not have this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This object represents the queue driver identified in its description.  Display
the pop-up menu to change the settings.  If the queue driver has no settings
(for example, PMPRINT or PMPLOT), you cannot display a pop-up menu for it.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job Dialog Before Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Job dialog before print check box if you want to specify job
properties on a per-job basis, rather than using the default job properties you
set up for the printer object.  Job properties include such characteristics as
number of copies, form size or name, portrait or landscape orientation, and
special effects (if available).  If this field has a check mark in it, then
whenever you select Print from the pop-up menu of an object, a window appears
that contains fields for setting up the job properties for the particular print
job.

Related Information:

Configuring print-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in this window to specify a separator-page file and to give the
printer a start and stop time.  The changes you make in this window do not take
effect until after you view another notebook page or close the printer object.

Note:   For network printer objects, only a network administrator can change
        the fields in this window.

 For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Separator file
o Start time
o Stop time
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Separator File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To type the name of the location containing separator page codes and text in
the Separator file field.  Specify both the path and file name.  You can use up
to 255 characters.

Note:   Only network administrators can fill in or change the Separator file
        field for a network printer object.

 To see the list of codes you use to set up a separator-page file, select the
topic below.

Related Information:

Separator page codes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Start Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To limit the hours during which jobs can print, select the time of the day when
the first job can begin printing:

 1. Select the arrows in the Hour field to indicate starting hour
 2. Select the arrows in the Min (minute) field to indicate minutes past the
    hour
 3. If your system uses a 12-hour clock, select the AM or PM radio button.

For example, to hold long jobs for printing after normal work hours, and if
your system uses a 12-hour clock, you can select 5 in the Hour field, leave 00
in the Min field, and select PM.  If your system uses a 24-hour clock, select
17 in the Hour field to represent 5 p.m..

If you type a start time, you must also fill in the Stop time field.

Note:   If both the Min and Hour fields show value of 0, the printer object
        runs continuously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Stop Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you filled in a start time, use this field to indicate the daily time
printing should stop:

 1. Select the arrows in the Hour field to indicate stopping hour
 2. Select the arrows in the Min (minute) field to indicate minutes past the
    hour
 3. If your system uses a 12-hour clock, select the AM or PM radio button.

For example, to stop the printer when day workers arrive, you can select 8 in
the Hour field, leave 00 in the Min field, and if your system uses a 12-hour
clock, select AM.

Note:   If both the Min and Hour fields show value of 0, the printer object
        runs continuously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Refresh Interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Refresh interval field displays a number representing the seconds between
the notices about your network print jobs.  The initial value for this interval
is 45 (seconds).  Select the appropriate arrow to increase or decrease the
value for the interval duration.  If this field shows 0 (no refresh interval),
the information does not refresh automatically.

Note:   You can refresh job information from a pop-up menu between intervals.
        Preferably, do not decrease a refresh interval below the initial value
        because refreshing uses system resources and can slow down other
        processes (such as printing).

 Related Information:

Refreshing print-job view


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Submission Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window describes conditions of job submission. The title at the top shows
the document name or the word untitled if the document has no name.  You can
change the Comment field.  The change you make does not take effect until you
view another notebook page or close the printer object.

The other fields give information you cannot change.  By selecting the
printer-driver object, you can see the job properties set up by the program
that submitted this job.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Date
o Time
o Size
o Comment
o Owner
o Printer driver
o Undo

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For network print jobs, the Owner field shows the userid of the person
submitting the job.  You cannot change the contents of this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Date field displays the date that the job was submitted.  You cannot change
this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Time field displays the hour and minutes past the hour that the job was
submitted.  You cannot change this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Size field shows the number of bytes in the print file for this job.  You
cannot change this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Comment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Comment field often identifies the program that submitted the print job.
Type your own comment to replace the contents of this field.  You can use up to
47 characters, and you can scroll the field for long comments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This object represents the printer driver and printer model selected for the
print job.  You can select this object if you want to see the job properties
set by the program used to create the document.

Related Information:

Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printing Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window gives information about the job factors related to spooling.  The
title at the top shows the document name or the word untitled if the document
has no name.  You can change the number of copies and job priority.  The
changes you make do not take effect until you view another notebook page or
close the printer object.

The other fields give information you cannot change.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Job identifier
o Job position
o Copies
o Priority
o Form name
o Job status
o Undo

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job Identifier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a number used to distinguish this job from others.  You
cannot change this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the number of the job in the queue.  For example, if this
field contains the number 3, two jobs must print before this one is printed.
You cannot change the Job position number in this Printing options window.  To
learn how to change the value, select the topic below.

Related Information

Changing print-job priority


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copies ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the number of copies requested for this job.  You can change
the number of copies.  Select the appropriate arrow to increase or decrease the
quantity in the Copies field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows a number that indicates the importance of printing this job as
compared with other jobs waiting for the same printer object.  Priority ranges
from a high value of 99 to the lowest priority, 1.  The higher the number, the
greater the chance this job prints before others.  Jobs with equal priority
print in the order in which they are submitted.

If the printer object is local (directly attached to your computer), you can
change priority to any number between 99 and 1.  If the printer object
represents a printer or plotter connected to a network, the owner of a print
job can change priority to a value equal to 50 or lower, and the network
administrator can change priority to any number between 99 and 1.

Select the appropriate arrow to increase or decrease the priority value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Form Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the name of the form selected for the job.  The form name
often gives information about the form size and indicates if it is a preprinted
form.  You can scroll the field to see a long form name.  You cannot change
this field.

Note:   If the form does not match the printer properties set up for this
        printer object, the job does not print, and the Job status field shows
        Forms mismatch. To learn how to change the form in the printer
        properties, select the topic below.

 Related Information:

Changing a printer form


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Job Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Job status field describes any conditions that affect the printing of the
job, for example, if a job requires a particular form that is not loaded in the
printer, or if the printer is out of paper.  Check this field if your job does
not print as quickly as you expect.  You can scroll the field to view a long
status message.  You cannot change this field.

To learn how to use the information in this field to solve print-job problems,
select the topic below.

Related Information:

Printing, problem determination


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window gives information about job factors controlled by the queue driver.
The title at the top shows the document name or the word untitled if the
document has no name.  In this window, you can change the code page, change the
type of output (color or black-and-white), and reverse the background and
foreground colors.  You can also override the area of page space the image
fills.

The changes you make do not take effect until you view another notebook page or
close the printer object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Code page
o Queue driver
o Type of Output
o Color Mapping
o Queue Driver Options
o Undo

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o Closing an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Code Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the number of the character code set used for this job. The
language used in the country where this document is read determines which code
page to select.  If you want to choose a different language, select the arrows
in the Code page field.

For more information about code pages, refer to IBM OS/2 2.0 Keyboards and Code
Pages. You can order this book by mailing in the publication order form found
in the OS/2* 2.0 operating system package.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The name below this object identifies the queue driver for this printer object.
Most printer objects use PMPRINT, even for plotting.  A printer object that
uses PMPLOT is set up for reverse clipping.

Related Information:

Enabling Reverse Clipping


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Driver Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A program uses FIT= to scale an image and ARE= to indicate the percentage of
paper area covered by an image.  You cannot change these values, but you can
select the Override check box to cancel their effects.  For example, you would
override Queue Driver Options if you do not like the positioning of a page of
print, or if printing results in losing information along one or more edges of
the page.

If FIT equals S, the image is scaled to the limits of the page.  If FIT equals
two number values, these numbers indicate, as percentages from the left and top
of the image, the point on the image that prints in the center of the page.

If ARE equals C, the whole page is used as a printing area.  If ARE equals four
number values, these numbers indicate the percentages of the page used to
print.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Type of Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Color to produce color output or Mono for black-on-white.  Type of
Output affects only printers with color printing capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Color Mapping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Normal to have the image print with its original background and
foreground colors.  For example, a normally printed page might have black
characters or lines.

Select Inverted to reverse the color of the printing from its original.  For
example, you might use Inverted if printing on dark paper so that the
characters or lines appear in white.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install New Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to add one or more new ports to your system.

 1. Insert the diskette containing new ports in drive A, or change the path in
    the Directory field.
 2. Select Refresh.
 3. Select one or more ports from the Output port field.
 4. Select Install.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Directory
o Output port
o Install
o Refresh
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directory field identifies the location of the information describing the
new port.  Because you normally receive new port information on a diskette, the
field has a initial value A:, indicating the diskette in drive A.  If you have
the new ports on a different disk or medium, type the new drive designation and
path in this field.  The field scrolls horizontally.

Note:   If you want to reinstall ports that are supplied with the OS/2*
        operating system (such as LPT1 through LPT3, or COM1 through COM4),
        type the following path in the Directory field:

                \OS2\DLL\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

After inserting a diskette or changing the Directory field, select Refresh to
display the contents of the designated drive or path.

If you change the disk or change the Directory field again, select Refresh
again to display the contents of the new disk or path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install to have the selected port or ports copied to your hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cancel if you want to cancel the installation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Output Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains all the ports available on the disk identified in the
Directory field.  Select each port you want to install on your system.  If
necessary, scroll the field to see more ports.  When ready, select Install.

Note:   Installed ports appear shaded.  You can display the pop-up menu for an
        installed port if you want to adjust its settings or communications setup.

 Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Parallel Port Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to adjust the period of time the printer or plotter needs to
assemble print job information.  You can also allow DOS applications to share
the access of the parallel port.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Description
o Timeout
o Share access
o OK
o Undo
o Default
o Cancel

Related Information:

Port, suggested timeout periods


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install New Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this choice to install printer drivers shipped with OS/2* 2.1 or shipped
separately.

If your printer driver was shipped with OS/2 2.1:

 1. Select Printer driver shipped with OS/2 in the Printer Driver Selection
    field.
 2. Select a printer driver from the list presented.
 3. Select Install.
 4. A window appears showing the location of the printer driver files.  If the
    location is not correct, type the correct directory designation.  Select
    OK.

If your printer driver was not received with OS/2 2.1:

 1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver in the Printer Driver Selection field.
 2. Insert the printer-driver diskette in drive A, or type a different drive
    designation and path in the Directory field.
 3. Select Refresh to display the contents of your drive and directory path in
    the Printer driver field.  You might need to wait a while for this field to
    fill.
 4. Scroll the Printer driver list to see all the drivers.  If the driver you
    need is not listed, insert another diskette or change the contents of the
    Directory field; then select Refresh again.
 5. Select one or more printer drivers from the Printer driver list.
 6. Select Install.  The Install push button actually installs the drivers onto
    your disk and into your system (*.INI) files.

After the printer driver is installed and selected for a printer object, you
can change printer properties from the Printer driver page in the Settings
notebook to describe the physical setup of your printer.

Note:   If you have difficulty installing a driver that was installed
        previously, select Cannot replace a printer driver from the list below.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Printer Driver Selection
o Directory
o Printer driver
o Install
o Refresh
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Printer drivers, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Cannot replace a printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directory field identifies the location of the information describing the
new driver.  The initial value of A:, indicates a diskette in drive A.  If you
have the drivers you want on a different disk or different medium, type the new
drive designation and path in this field.  The field scrolls horizontally.

Related Information:

Finding an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains all the printer drivers available on the disk identified in
the Directory field.  Select a driver for each model printer you want to
install for use with your system.  You can scroll the field to see more
drivers.

If you need more information to determine which driver or drivers work with
your printer, select the topic in the "Related Information" list below.

When ready, select Install.

Related Information:

Viewing printer-driver models and fonts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install to have the selected driver or drivers copied to your hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install Printer Driver Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This message appears if you try to use a network printer object and you do not
have the appropriate printer driver installed on your local system.

Note:   Write down the driver name shown on the first line of the message.  You
        use this information to identify the driver you need among a group of
        drivers shown during printer driver installation.

 For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Install
o Cancel

Related Information:

Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install if you want to install the printer driver identified at the top
of the message window.  Another window appears from which you select the
printer driver you need to install.

If you need more help, select the Help push button after the installation
window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cancel if you do not want to install the printer driver identified at
the top of the message window.  Because you cannot use a printer object that
requires a particular printer driver if you do not install that driver, you
will need to print your job on a different printer object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install New Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to add one or more queue drivers to your system.

 1. Insert the diskette containing the drivers in drive A, or type the path in
    the Directory field.
 2. Select Refresh.
 3. Select one or more queue drivers from the Queue driver field.
 4. Select Install.

After you install a driver, it appears shaded in the Queue driver list.  If you
exit the Install New Queue Driver window, you can change the settings that
describe its setup. (Not all queue drivers have settings.)

o Directory
o Queue driver
o Install
o Refresh
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Queues and spooler, description of
o Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directory field identifies the location of the information describing the
new driver.  Because you normally receive queue drivers on a diskette, the
Directory field has an initial value of A:, indicating a diskette in drive A.
If you have the drivers you want on a different disk or medium, type the
correct drive designation and path in this field.  The field scrolls
horizontally.

Note:   If you want to reinstall drivers that are supplied with the OS/2*
        operating system (such as PMPRINT or PMPLOT), you type the following
        path in the Directory field:

                \OS2\DLL\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains all the queue drivers available on the disk identified in
the Directory field.  Installed drivers appear shaded.  Select one or more
drivers that you want to install for use with your printer object.  If
necessary, you can scroll the field to see more drivers.

When ready, select Install.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install to have the selected driver or drivers copied to your hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Open from the printer driver pop-up menu to see the printer properties
for a particular model printer.  Change these settings to reflect the physical
state of your printer (such as form loaded, fonts used, and so forth).

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Open to adjust port settings.  For additional help, select the Help push
button after the settings window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Open to adjust queue driver settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install to have a new port copied to your system.  For example, you
would select Install if you install hardware connections in addition to LPT1 to
LPT3 and COM1 to COM4.  You need to install the driver for the port, and have
the system create an object to represent it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Install to have a new driver copied to your system.  For example, you
would select Install if you purchase a new printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Redirection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Redirection to redirect non-Presentation Manager print jobs from an LPT
port to a printer object associated with a different printer port.  For
example, if you use a print command such as PRINT, you cannot specify COM1 (a
communications port) as the output port.  You can, however, use Redirection to
send your print jobs to the print object whose output port is COM1.

Note:   A non-PM print job refers to using a print command from the command
        line of an OS/2, DOS, or WIN-OS/2 session.

If you select the arrow to the right of Redirection, a menu appears.  From this
menu, select the port to which you want non-PM print jobs to be spooled.

For example, to redirect non-PM print output from LPT2 to COM1, do the
following:

 1. Create a print object whose output port is COM1.
 2. Open this print object's settings Output page and display the pop-up menu
    for LPT2.
 3. Select Redirection, and select COM1.
 4. Close this print object's settings notebook (with COM1 still selected as
    the Output port).

All non-PM print jobs sent to LPT2 will be spooled into this print object and
printed on COM1.

Related Information:

o Printing to a COM port
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printing outside the workplace shell


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to remove this port from your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to remove this driver from your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window indicates you selected Delete from a port pop-up menu, and the port
you want to delete is selected for one or more printer objects.  Before you can
delete the port, you must select a different port for each printer object on
the list.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Printer objects
o Cancel

Related Information:

Changing the printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows all the printer objects that use this port.  Before you can
delete the port, you must select a different port for each printer object on
the list.

Related Information:

Changing the printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This printer object uses the port you want to delete.  Before you can delete
the port, you must change the port for this printer object.

Related Information:

Changing the printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cancel if you decide not to delete the port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window indicates you selected Delete from a printer driver pop-up menu,
and the driver you want to delete is selected for one or more printer objects.
Before you can delete the driver, you must deselect the driver from the
settings for each printer object in the list.  You must also change the default
printer driver for any printer object that uses this driver as its default.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Printer objects
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Changing the default printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows all the printer objects that use this printer driver.  Before
you can delete the driver, you must deselect the driver from the settings for
each printer object in the list.  You must also change the default printer
driver for any printer object that uses this driver as its default.

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Changing the default printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This printer object has, as one of its settings, the printer driver you want to
delete.  Before you can delete the printer driver, you must display the
settings for this printer object, and deselect the printer driver (on the
Printer driver settings page).  You might also need to change the default
printer driver for this printer object.

Related Information:

o Changing the settings of objects
o Changing the default printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cancel if you decide not to delete the driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window indicates you selected Delete from a queue driver pop-up menu, and
the driver you want to delete is selected for one or more printer objects.
Before you can delete the driver, select a different queue driver for each
printer object in the list.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Printer objects
o Cancel

Related Information:

Changing the queue driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows all the printer objects that use this queue driver.  Before
you can delete the driver, select a different queue driver for each printer
object in the list.

Related Information:

Changing the queue driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This printer object uses the queue driver you want to delete.  Before you can
delete the driver, you must select a different queue driver for this printer
object.

Related Information:

Changing the queue driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The spooler manages all the jobs pending on your system.

When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in the place on
your system designated as the Spooler path. If you need to change the location
of the Spooler path (for example, you would change the path to a separate disk
if your system cannot fit all your spool files on the disk where the current
Spooler path is located), select the Spooler object.  You can adjust the speed
at which spooled print jobs are printed, by setting the print priority for your
system.

You can disable (turn off) spooling for printer objects connected directly to
your computer.  However, when the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go
directly to a printer and a printout might contain material from different jobs
mixed together.  You cannot disable spooling to a network printer object.

Related Information:

o Changing the spooler path
o Disabling the spooler
o Enabling the spooler
o Queues and spooler, description of
o Changing the print priority


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Spool Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to specify the spool-file path.  For example, you might change
the spool path if you create many or large spool files and have a separate disk
for them.

 1. Wait until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
 2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
 3. Type the new path in the Spool path field.
 4. Close the Spooler object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Spool path
o Default
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Deleting print jobs
o Holding or releasing a printer
o Closing an object
o Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Spool Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to specify a new path for storing system spool files.  The
default path is \SPOOL on your hard disk.

Note:   The new path takes effect when you close the Spooler object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Disable Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Disable spooler to indicate that the next time you start your system, your
print jobs will not be spooled.  For example, you might want to disable the
spooler if you need to create so many basic printing jobs or printer-specific
jobs that spool files would crowd your disk.  Remember, this change does not
take effect until the next time you start your system.

Note:   While the spooler is disabled, the system cannot prevent the mixing of
        contents from different jobs in a single printout.

Related Information:

o Printing outside the workplace shell
o Creating a printer-specific job
o Restarting your system
o Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Enable Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Enable spooler if you have disabled your spooler previously and now want to
allow your print jobs to spool again.

Related Information:

Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Open if you want to change the path where the system stores your print
job spool files.  Opening the Spooler always displays the Settings view, where
you can type the name of the path you prefer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Data Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This message appears when the system cannot determine what type (for example,
text, graphics, or printer-specific) object you have selected for printing.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Plain text
o Printer-specific


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Plain Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Plain text if the object contains only letters, numbers, and other
keyboard characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer-Specific ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Printer-specific to indicate that the object you want to print is a
printer-specific file, such as a print job your program has formatted for
printing on a system that does not run the OS/2* operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window appears when you select a printer object that has Output to file
selected in the Output page of the printer object settings.  To have your
document formatted for the appropriate printer or plotter, then saved in a file
on your disk:

 1. Type the file name, or an alternative, in the File name field.
 2. Select OK.

Note:   The file you create is binary.  When you are ready to print the file,
        either drag the data-file object to the printer object, or use the
        operating system PRINT or COPY command with the /B parameter.

 For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o File name
o OK
o Cancel

Related Information:

Printing to a file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this field, you can type any of the following:

o The name of a data file, or a path and file name where you want to store the
  document in a format ready for printing.
o A port, such as LPT1, NUL, or CON.
o A pipe, for example, \\PIPE\....
o A universal naming convention (UNC) name, for example, \\server1\...

Note:   The file you create is binary.  When you are ready to print the file,
        either drag the data-file object to the printer object, or use the
        operating system PRINT or COPY command with the /B parameter.

 Related Information:

o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o Printing to a file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Templates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Templates to create objects you want to add to a folder or to your desktop.
The Templates folder contains forms (templates) of various objects, which
initially are:

Program
          Used to create a new program object for an individual program, or for
          a session, such as a full-screen or windowed command prompt.
Printer
          Used to create a new printer object when you set up a new printer or
          plotter, or to provide an alternative setup for an existing device.
          If you use a network that has printers or plotters, you will also
          have a Network Printer template.
Folder
          Used to set up an empty folder.
Data File
          Used to set up a blank data-file object.
Color Palette, Font Palette, Scheme Palette
          Used to create additional groups of colors, fonts, or schemes for
          customizing your screen.

The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating system was
installed.  Some templates that might be added are:

o A template you have created for a specific data file.  For example, you might
  create the template, Customer Order Form.
o A specific data file type supplied with a program.  For example, when you
  install a spreadsheet program that comes with sample spreadsheet files, the
  system places a spreadsheet template in the Templates folder.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

To see a description about templates and their characteristics, select Template
below.

Related Information:

o Template
o Creating an object (using a template)
o Creating a program session
o Creating a printer object
o Creating a template
o Accessing another network object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Program to create a program object.

For example, you might need a program object to start a program if one is not
automatically created when you install the program.

You can also use Program to create an additional program object for a
particular program or session, and then set up the additional program object
differently from the original.

Note:   Create multiple program objects to point to the same program, rather
        than making multiple copies of the program on your hard disk.

 Related Information:

o Creating a program object (using a template)
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Folder to create a new, empty folder.  You can then change its name and put
objects (including other folders) into it.

Related Information:

o Template
o Creating an object (using a template)
o Changing names of objects
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Data File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Data File to create a new, blank data-file object; and then change the name
of the new object.  By default, when you select a data-file object, you also
start the OS/2* System Editor.

You can also associate other programs with a data-file object.  To learn how to
cause a different program to automatically start when you select the data-file
object, select Associating programs and data-file objects from the "Related
Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Template
o File and directory concepts
o Creating an object (using a template)
o Changing names of objects
o Associating programs and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Printer to create a new printer object on your desktop (for example, when
you connect a new printer or plotter to your system).  Use the settings of the
printer object to describe the setup of the printer or plotter.  You can then
drop any object that you want to print or plot on the printer object.

Related Information:

o Creating a printer object
o Changing settings of objects
o Printing objects
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Color Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Color Palette to change your screen colors (for example, a folder
background or a window part, such as the title bar).  You can create your own
colors and you can keep several palettes of colors.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Creating a new color


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Color Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window displays color samples.  To set the color of an object on your
desktop, drag the desired color from the samples to the object you want to
color.  For example, you can drag red to one window and green to another.  To
change the background color of all windows in the system, hold down Alt when
you drag the color from the palette.  To change the foreground color of a
window, hold down Ctrl when you drag the color from the palette.

To create your own colors, select the Edit color push button.

Note:   You can make several different color palettes, each having 30 colors.
        Display the pop-up menu to create another color palette.

 Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Edit Color window to change a selected color.  For example, you might
select a color from the Color Palette, then select the Edit color push button
on the palette to reach this Edit Color window.

The black lines in the color wheel to the left of the window cross at the color
you selected for edit, indicating a preselected choice.  Where the lines cross,
they act like a pointer, and you can drag this pointer to change or adjust the
preselected choice.

To display more fields in which you can specify the amount of red, green, and
blue in your color, or specify values for hue, saturation, and brightness,
select the Values push button.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Color wheel
o Brightness slider
o Values
o Solid color
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Color Wheel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the colors available for your display device.  When you select
a color (for example, from the Color Palette), the pointer in the color wheel
is positioned at your preselected color.  The slider at the right of the color
wheel shows the range of values for the selected color.

To change the currently selected color, move the pointer with your mouse or
arrow keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Brightness Slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This slider shows a range of brightness, or light to dark values, for the color
selected in the color wheel to the left.  To adjust the brightness, drag the
slider arm.

Select the Solid color check box to change the slider to a few areas of solid
color.

Note:   If you prefer to adjust the color using a number value for brightness,
        select the Values push button to see more fields.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Values if you want to specify number values for red, green, and blue, or
for hue, brightness, and saturation.  The fields you need to select these
values appear in the window, below the push buttons.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o RGB/HSB
o Red/Hue
o Green/Saturation
o Blue/Brightness


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for RGB/HSB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the radio buttons to indicate how you want to adjust the color
you are mixing.  Select RGB to enable you to adjust the amount of red, green,
and blue in your color; then use the Red, Green, and Blue fields.  Select HSB
to enable you to adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of your color; then
use the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness fields.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Red/Hue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The meaning of the value in this field depends upon whether you have selected
the RGB or HSB check box.

If you selected the RGB radio button, this field contains a number representing
the amount of red you want to mix into a color.  Use the appropriate arrow to
the right of the field to increase or decrease the number.

If the field shows 0, the color contains no red.  The value 255 means the color
contains the maximum amount of red possible.

If you selected the HSB radio button, this field shows a number representing
hue, or position of a color along the circumference of the color wheel.  The
values range between 0 and 360 to represent mixtures of red, green, and blue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Green/Saturation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The meaning of the value in this field depends upon whether you have selected
the RGB or HSB check box.

If you selected the RGB radio button, this field contains a number representing
the amount of green you want to mix into a color. Use the appropriate arrow to
the right of the field to increase or decrease the number.

If the field shows 0, the color contains no green.  The value 255 means the
color contains the maximum amount of green possible.

If you selected the HSB radio button, this field shows a number representing
color saturation.  Saturation indicates a measurement of the color's distance
from white, at the center of the color wheel, or the length of the radius
pointing to the color from the center of the wheel.  Saturation ranges from 0
to 100.  A low number in this field means a large amount of white.  The value
100 means the color contains the maximum amount of hue possible, and is along
the outer edge of the color wheel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Blue/Brightness ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The meaning of the value in this field depends upon whether you have selected
the RGB or HSB check box.

If you selected the RGB radio button, this field contains a number representing
the amount of blue you want to mix into a color.  Use the appropriate arrow to
the right of the field to increase or decrease the number.

If the field shows 0, the color contains no blue.  The value 255 means the
color contains the maximum amount of blue possible.

If you selected the HSB radio button, this field shows a number representing
color brightness.  Brightness means the lightness or darkness of a color.  A
value of 0 in this field means maximum darkness, and you perceive the color as
if you see it without the aid of light.  The value 100 means maximum lightness,
and you perceive the hue as you see it in bright sunlight.

To change the value for brightness, use the arrows or adjust the slider to the
right of the color wheel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Solid Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box if you want to create a solid color.  When Solid color is
selected, the Brightness Slider is divided into a few solid areas of color,
including the selected color, black, and gray.

When the Solid color is not selected, the Brightness Slider contains the
selected color with shading added gradually to show a range in brightness
value.  Your screen might show this shading as a pattern, rather than a solid
color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Serial Port Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to adjust the settings of a serial communications port.  The
default settings fit most printers or plotters.  You can change fields in this
window to match the settings recommended in the manufacturer's documentation.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Description
o Timeout
o Baud Rate
o Word Length
o Parity
o Stop Bits
o Handshake
o OK
o Undo
o Default
o Cancel

Related Information:

Port, suggested timeout periods


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the name that helps identify this port.  The field scrolls
horizontally.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Baud Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Baud Rate field shows the current baud rate set up for this port.  The
initial value for printer and plotter communications is 9600.  If you need to
adjust this value up or down to conform with manufacturer's specifications,
select the appropriate arrow.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Word Length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the number of bits that corresponds to the word length of the characters
you send to the printer or plotter.  The preselected choice is 8 bits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the word that corresponds to the type of parity checking your printer or
plotter requires.  The preselected choice is None.

Note:   If the manufacturer's documentation specifies that the printer ignores
        parity but still expects it, select a parity other than None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Stop Bits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the number that corresponds to the signal length that your printer or
plotter manufacturer specifies for stop bits.  The preselected choice is 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Handshake ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the word that corresponds to the type of handshake
that your printer or plotter requires.  Handshake describes the communication
between the devices (the communications protocol between the OS/2* operating
system and your printer or plotter).

Use the preselected choice, Hardware, if the exchange of information is
controlled by electronic signaling (DTR Pacing).  Cabling must conform to the
precise specifications of the manufacturer for the printer to work properly
using the hardware serial port handshake.

Select None if the exchange of information is between programs and is
controlled by XON/XOFF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Timeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Timeout field shows the number of seconds that the computer retries before
changing the printer object status to Error because it senses a print-error
condition.  The initial value, 45, suits most printers.  Select the appropriate
arrow to adjust the number of seconds.

Related Information:

Port, suggested timeout periods


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Port, Suggested Timeout Periods ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the list below to select the appropriate timeout period for your model
printer:

o Matrix printers, including Proprinter* and Epson** printers: 10 seconds or
  less.  A short timeout allows rapid reporting of conditions, such as printer
  off-line or out of paper.
o Laser printers, such as the 4019* or HP** LaserJet**-type printers: 45
  seconds.  These printers might need time to process your print information
  before printing.
o PostScript** printers: 120 seconds or more.  These printers often need a lot
  of time to process information before printing a page and signaling readiness
  to receive more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer-Driver Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this folder to see the printer models supported by the printer driver
named below the folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Icon.ico ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Icon.ico to create a new, blank icon data-file object; and then change the
name of the new object.  By default, when you select a data-file object, you
also start the OS/2* Icon Editor.  You can create a new icon data-file object
to use as an icon for any other object.  Use the Find push button on the
General page in the Settings notebook to locate the icon.  For more
information, select Template from "Related Information."

You also can associate other programs with a data-file object.  To learn how to
automatically start a different program when you select the data-file object,
select Associating programs and data-file objects below.

Related Information:

o Associating programs and data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Creating an object (using a template)
o File and directory concepts
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Pointer.ptr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Pointer.ptr to create a new, blank pointer data-file object; and then
change the name of the new object.  By default, when you select a data-file
object, you also start the OS/2* Icon Editor.  Pointer data-file objects are
used to change the appearance of the mouse pointer.

You also can associate other programs with a data-file object.  To learn how to
automatically start a different program when you select the data-file object,
select Associating programs and data-file objects below.

Related Information:

o Associating programs and data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Creating an object (using a template)
o File and directory concepts
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Bitmap.bmp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Bitmap.bmp to create a new, blank bit-map data-file object; and then change
the name of the new object.  By default, when you select a data-file object,
you also start the OS/2* Icon Editor.  You can create a new bit-map data-file
object that represents the bit map for the background of the desktop or any
other folder.  Use the Find push button on the Background page in the Settings
notebook to locate the bit map.  For more information, select Template from
"Related Information."

You also can associate other programs with a data-file object.  To learn how to
automatically start a different program when you select the data-file object,
select Associating programs and data-file objects below.

Related Information:

o Associating programs and data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Creating an object (using a template)
o File and directory concepts
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install New Printer Driver Push Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Install new printer driver push button if your printer driver is not
listed in the window.  The Install New Printer Driver window appears in which
you install the printer driver you need as the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Help for Share Access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check the Share access checkbox to allow multiple DOS applications to share a
parallel port.  This might be required for those DOS applications that try to
access a port during initialization.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can adjust the speed at which spooled jobs are printed by setting the print
priority for your system.

Printing priority.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Printer Driver Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can install printer drivers that you received with OS/2 2.1 or that were
shipped separately.  Select Printer driver shipped with OS/2 to list all of the
printer drivers that came with OS/2 2.1.  If you have an OS/2 printer driver
from another source, that was not shipped with OS/2 2.1, select Other OS/2
printer driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Help for Printer Driver Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Press OK if the location of the printer driver files is correct; or type the
drive designation and path for the directory where the printer driver resides.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Network to gain access to resources that you share with others on a
network.  The Network folder contains other folders that represent the way in
which your shared resources are organized into groups.  These group folders
also contain other folders and objects that represent printers, plotters,
programs, and data files.

Double-click on Network to see the group folders.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Group Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this folder to open a window showing the objects available on the network
named below the folder.  For example, if you have two networks available, one
that uses OS/2* LAN Server and another that uses Novell** NetWare**, you have a
separate, appropriately-named folder for each.

This folder might contain other folders representing the way in which your
network group is organized.  For example, some networks have servers, which are
computers that have shared disks, printers, or plotters.  Other network groups
do not contain servers and show only their shared resources. Double-click on
this network group folder to see its contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this folder to open a window showing the shared directories and printer
objects that are available through the server named below the folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this printer object to drop data-file objects that you want produced on a
network printer or plotter.

To learn how to print an object, select Printing on a network from the "Related
Information" list below.  To see the jobs waiting to print, double-click on the
printer object.

Display the menu for this printer object to:

o Refresh the view of its print jobs.
o Assign a port for printing from a program or command, then unassign the port
  again.
o Log in, if required, to use the printer, then log out when you are finished
  using it.
o Copy the printer object if you want to describe an alternate default job
  setup.
o Move the printer object outside the Network folder.
o Create a shadow of this object in another area of your desktop, so that you
  can use the directory without first displaying the contents of the Network
  folder.
o Access another printer or plotter by adding an object to represent it.

If you are an IBM* LAN Server network administrator, display the menu to
perform tasks such as creating another printer object when you add a printer or
plotter to the network.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printing on a network
o Creating a shadow of an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this folder to gain access to program objects and data-file objects that
you share with other network users.  To see the program and data-file objects
available, double-click on this directory folder.

With the authorization of your network administrator, you can copy or move an
object you want to share to this folder.

Display the menu for this object to:

o Refresh the view of its contents.
o Assign a drive designation for use with a program or operating-system
  command, then unassign the drive again.
o Log in, if required, to use the directory, then log out when you are finished
  using it.
o Create a shadow of this object in another area of your desktop so you can use
  the directory without first displaying the contents of the Network folder.
o Access another network directory (from a different network group) by creating
  an object to represent it.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Creating a shadow of an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Refresh to obtain the most recent information about the contents of this
folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Assign drive to associate this network directory with a drive designation
(such as N:).  In the window that is displayed, select the drive letter that
will enable you to use programs or operating-system commands with the network
directory in the same way you would use them with a directory on your local
system.

You do not need to assign a drive letter to use this directory as an object in
the Network folder, or to use its shadow on your desktop.

Related Information:

Using an assigned drive-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Unassign Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Unassign drive to free the assigned drive.  You then can reuse the drive
letter to identify a different drive or network directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Assign port to associate this network printer object with a port
designation (such as LPT2).  In the window that is displayed, select the port
that enables you to print from a program or from a command prompt.

You do not need to assign a port if you print a data-file object by dragging it
to the network printer object, or if you request printing from a Presentation
Manager* program.

Related Information:

Using an assigned port-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Unassign Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Unassign port to free the assigned port.  You then can reuse the port
designation for another network printer object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Remote Admin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Remote admin to set up a new network printer object (Create another),
delete an existing printer object (Delete), or copy a second printer object for
the same port on the remote computer (Copy).  Remote admin enables you to
perform these tasks from your workstation, rather that at the server.

Note:   The Remote admin menu options are provided for use with IBM OS/2 LAN
        Server Version 2.0 (or later), and can only be used by a network
        administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Access Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Access another to add an object that represents a server, network
directory, or network printer object to your list of network objects.  A window
is displayed in which you identify the object you want to add.

Note:   If your network uses OS/2* LAN Server, and you need an object connected
        to a domain other than your login domain, use Access another to add the
        object from the other domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Shadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create shadow to place a duplicate of this network object in another folder
or on your desktop.  For example, you can create a folder containing shadows of
frequently-used resources, where you can gain access to them easily.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Login ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Login to obtain access to the selected network object.  A window is
displayed in which you type your user identification and your password.

If you do not know your user identification or password, ask your network
administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Logout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Logout when you are finished with a network object to which you are logged
in.  You should also select Logout whenever you leave your workstation to
protect a resource against use by someone who does not have an assigned login
identification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Login ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Login fields to provide information that identifies you as having
authorization to use the network named in the Network field.

 1. Type your user identification.
 2. Type your password (if needed).
 3. Change the default value in the Login to field, if necessary.
 4. Select OK.

Note:   You remain logged in until you select Logout from the menu for this object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Description
o User ID
o Password
o Login to
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Login ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Login fields to provide the information that identifies you as having
authorization to use the server named in the Server field.

 1. Type your user identification.
 2. Type your password (if needed).
 3. Select OK.

Note:   You remain logged in until you select Logout from the menu for this
        server.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Description
o User ID
o Password
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Login ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Login fields to provide information that identifies you as having
authorization to use the network directory or printer object named in the
Resource field.

 1. Type your user identification.
 2. Type your password (if needed).
 3. Select OK.

Note:   You remain logged in until you select Logout from the menu for this resource.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o Description
o User ID
o Password
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Login To ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Login to field identifies the domain (for OS/2* LAN Server networks) or
server you can access when you log in.  The initial value identifies your
default login domain or server.  To log in to a different domain or server,
type its name in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network field identifies the network to which you have access.  You cannot
change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field identifies the server to which you have access.  A server can
connect you to one or more data-file objects, program objects, and printer
objects.

You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource field identifies the network directory or printer object to which
you have access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains a description of the directory or the printer
object named in the Resource field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for User ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type your user identification in the User ID field.

Note:   If you type the wrong value in either the User ID field or the Password
        field, your attempt to log in does not succeed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type your password in the Password field, if you need it to log in.  The
characters you type are not displayed in the field.

Note:   If you type the wrong value in either the User ID field or the Password
        field, your attempt to log in does not succeed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Logout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window identify a network to which you have access.  To
remove access, select OK.

Note:   You should always log out before leaving your system unattended.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Description
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Logout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window identify a server to which you have access.  To
remove access, select OK.

Note:   You should always log out before leaving your system unattended.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Description
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Logout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window identify a network directory or printer object to
which you have access.  To remove access, select OK.

Note:   You should always log out before leaving your system unattended.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o Description
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the field in this window to associate the network directory, named in the
title of the window, with a drive letter.  For example, you might need to
assign a letter if you use the directory with a program on your local system,
or with an operating-system command (such as COPY) that you type at a command
prompt.

You do not need to assign a drive letter to use this directory as an object in
the Network folder, or to use its shadow object on your desktop.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Assign drive
o OK
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Unassigning a drive
o Using an assigned drive-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the drive designations that you can assign to the directory.

 1. Select the arrow to the right of the field to see the list.
 2. Select the letter you want to use.
 3. Select OK.

Note:   If the list is empty, you have assigned all the drive designations
        available to you.  To free a drive designation so that you can assign
        it to this directory, select Unassign drive from the pop-up menu of a
        directory that has an assigned drive.

Related Information:

Using an assigned drive-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the field in this window to associate the network printer or plotter,
identified in the title of the window, with a port designation  For example,
you might need to assign a port if you print from a program on your local
system, or print with an operating-system command (such as PRINT or COPY) that
you type at a command prompt.

You do not need to assign a port designation if you print a data-file object by
dragging it to the network printer object, or if you request printing from a
Presentation Manager* program.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Assign port
o OK
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Unassigning a port
o Using an assigned port-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assign Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the port designations that you can assign to the network
printer or plotter.

 1. Select the arrow to the right of the field to see the list.
 2. Select the port designation you want to use.
 3. Select OK.

Note:   If the list is empty, you have assigned all the port designations
        available to you.  To free a port designation, select Unassign port
        from the pop-up menu of a network printer object that has an assigned
        port.

Related Information:

Using an assigned port-examples


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Access Another Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in this window to identify a server in another network that you
need to view.

 1. Select the name of the network that contains this server.
 2. Select or type the server name.
 3. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Access Another Network Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in this window to identify a directory in another network that
you need to view.

 1. Select the name of the network that contains the directory.
 2. Select or type the name of the server that connects the directory to its
    network.
 3. Select or type the name of the network directory.
 4. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Access Another Network Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in this window to identify a printer or plotter in another
network that you want to use.

 1. Select the name of the network that contains the printer or plotter.
 2. Select or type the name of the server that connects the printer or plotter
    to its network.
 3. Select or type the name of the network printer or plotter.
 4. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of all the networks that you can access.  Select the
arrow to the right of the field to see the list; then select the network group
you want to access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of servers that you can use.  Select the arrow to
the right of the field to see the list; then select the server you want to add
to your Network folder.  Or, you can type the name of the server you want to
add in the Server field.  If you do not know the name, ask your network
administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of servers that you can use.  Select the arrow to
the right of the field to see the list; then select the server that provides
access to the network directory you want to use.  Or, you can type the name of
the server you need in the Server field.  If you do not know the name, ask your
network administrator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of servers that you can use.  Select the arrow to
the right of the field to see the list; then select the server that provides
access to the printer or plotter that you want to use.  Or, you can type the
name of the server you need in the Server field.  If you do not know the name,
ask your network administrator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of network directories that you can use.  Select the
arrow to the right of the field to see the list; then select the directory you
want to add to your Network folder.  Or, you can type the name of the directory
you want to add in the Resource field.  If you do not know the name, ask your
network administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains a list of network printer objects that you can use.  Select
the arrow to the right of the field to see the list; then select the printer or
plotter you want to add to your Network folder.  Or, you can type the name of
the device you want to add in the Resource field.  If you do not know the name,
ask your network administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window describe the status of the network.  Use this window
to determine if the network is available and if you must log in to use it.  You
cannot change the field values in this window.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Description
o Status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window describe the status of the server.  Use this window
to determine if the server is available and if you must log in to use it.  You
cannot change the field values in this window.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Description
o Status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window describe the status of the network directory named in
the Resource field.  Use this window to determine if the directory is available
and if you must log in to use it.  You cannot change the field values in this
window.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o Description
o Status
o Assigned drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The fields in this window describe the status of the network printer object
named in the Resource field.  Use this window to determine if the object is
available and if you must log in to use it.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Network
o Server
o Resource
o Description
o Status
o Assigned port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network field identifies the selected network by its system name.  You
cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains additional identifying information about the
network named in the Network field.  You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status field specifies whether or not the network is available for your
use, with the following messages:

o Available:  The network is functioning normally and you can use it
  immediately.
o Login required:  You must type a valid user identification, and possibly a
  password, before you can gain access to the objects in the folder for this
  network.  To log in to the selected network, select Login from the pop-up
  menu of the network folder.
o Not available:  You cannot use the selected network.  For example, the
  network might be powered off.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network field identifies the network that contains this server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Server field identifies the selected server by its system name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains additional identifying information about the
server named in the Server field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status field specifies whether or not the server is available for your use,
with the following messages:

o Available:  The server is functioning normally and you can use it
  immediately.
o Login required:  You must type a valid user identification, and possibly a
  password, before you can gain access to this server.  To log in, select Login
  from the pop-up menu of the server folder.
o Not available:  You cannot use the selected server at this time.  For
  example, the server might be powered off or disconnected from the network.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network field identifies the network that contains this network directory.
You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Server field identifies the server that has the disk for this network
directory connected to it.  You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource field identifies the selected network directory.  You cannot
change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains additional identifying information about the
network directory named in the Resource field.  You cannot change the value in
this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status field specifies whether or not the selected directory is available
for your use, with the following messages:

o Available:  The disk or disks for this network directory are functioning
  normally.  You can use the directory immediately.
o Login required:  You must type a valid user identification, and possibly a
  password, before you can gain access to this directory.  To log in, select
  Login from the pop-up menu of the directory folder.
o Not available:  You cannot use the selected directory resource at this time.
  For example, the server that connects the directory might be powered off, or
  the directory might be removed from the network's list of available
  resources.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assigned Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Assigned drive field contains the drive designation of the selected network
directory.  If you do not assign a drive letter, this field shows the word
None.

Related Information:

Assigning a drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network field identifies the network that contains the selected network
printer object.  You cannot change the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Server field identifies the server that controls the printer or plotter
represented by the selected network printer object.  You cannot change the
value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource field identifies the network printer object.  You cannot change
the value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains additional identifying information about the
network printer object named in the Resource field.  You cannot change the
value in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status field specifies whether or not the selected printer object is
available for your use, with the following messages:

o Available:  The printer or plotter this object represents is functioning
  normally, as is the server that contains it.  You can use the printer object
  immediately.
o Login required:  You must type a valid user identification, and possibly a
  password, before you can use this printer object.  To log in, select Login
  from the printer object's pop-up menu.
o Not available:  You cannot use the selected printer object at this time.  For
  example, the server that connects the printer might be powered off, or the
  printer object might be removed from the network's list of available
  resources.

For more detailed information about the status of the printer object, select
Viewing printer jobs and status below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing print-jobs information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Assigned Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Assigned port field contains the port designation of the printer object
named in the Resource field.  If you do not assign a port, this field shows the
word None.

Related Information:

Assigning a port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Help for Keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Keyboard to customize key settings, rates at which keystrokes are accepted
and characters are displayed, and the settings that make the keyboard easier to
use for those with special needs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Keyboard Mappings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the keyboard mappings, or settings, to customize your keyboard
to your preference.

To change a key setting, such as the key for displaying pop-up menus, select a
key from Primary Key with the up or down arrow.  If you want the setting to
include a key combination in addition to the primary key, select one or more
keys from Additional Keys (Shift, Ctrl, or Alt).

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Editing title text
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Displaying Pop-up Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to change the key, or set of keys, used to display pop-up
menus.

To change the setting, select a key from Primary Key with the up or down arrow.
If you want the setting to include a key combination in addition to the primary
key, select one or more keys from Additional Keys (Shift, Ctrl, or Alt).

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Editing Title Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to change the key, or set of keys, used to start editing the
names of objects and title bars.

To change the setting, select a key from Primary Key with the up or down arrow.
If you want the setting to include a key combination in addition to the primary
key, select one or more keys from Additional Keys (Shift, Ctrl, or Alt).

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Keyboard Timing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Timing fields affect how rapidly the cursor blinks, and the rate of speed at
which your keyboard accepts and displays keystrokes when keys are pressed and
held down.

You can change any of the current settings by moving the slider arms. You then
can test the new setting in the Test here field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Repeat rate
o Cursor blink rate
o Repeat delay rate
o Test here
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Repeat Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to adjust the speed at which a held-down key repeats its
function (Repeat Rate). Drag the slider arm to the left to decrease the rate,
or to the right to increase it.  To check the rate, tab to the Test here field,
then press and hold down any key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Repeat Delay Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to adjust the amount of time that is to elapse from when a
key is first pressed until the repeat rate takes effect (Repeat Delay).  Drag
the slider arm to the left to decrease the time, or to the right to increase
it.  To check the time, tab to the Test here field, then press and hold down
any key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cursor Blink Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to adjust the rate of speed at which the cursor blinks on
the screen. Drag the slider arm to the left to decrease the rate, or to the
right to increase it.  To check the rate, tab to the Test here field and
observe the speed at which the cursor blinks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Test Here ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to experiment with each of the settings as you adjust them.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Repeat rate
o Cursor blink rate
o Repeat delay rate


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Special Needs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Settings Activation On radio button for Special Needs keyboard settings is
selected.

If you have shut down your system and want to make the settings and sticky keys
input methods active when you turn the system on:

o Press and hold the Shift key for five seconds, until you have heard two
  beeps.

  The first beep indicates that settings are about to be activated. The second
  beep indicates that the settings are active.

For information about Sticky keys, refer to the "Related Information" list.

To disable or change these settings:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select System Setup.
 3. Select Keyboard.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for Keyboard.
 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 6. Select Settings.
 7. Select the Special Needs tab.

Related Information:

o Opening an object
o Opening a folder
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages
o Key assignments for OS/2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Special Needs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Special needs settings make the keyboard easier to use for those with special
requirements.

You can adjust how long a key must be held down before it is accepted as a
keystroke (Acceptance delay), the rate of speed at which the key will repeat
its function when it is held down (Repeat rate), and how long a pressed key
must be held down before it begins repeating its function (Delay until repeat).

The sticky keys input method lets you press and release a series of keys (for
example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have the keys behave as if the keys
were pressed and released at the same time.

For information about Sticky keys, refer to the "Related Information" list.

If your computer is shared by someone who does not require the special needs
settings, the settings can be deactivated, or they can be set to turn off
automatically with the Settings Time-Out field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Settings activation
o Settings timeout
o Acceptance delay
o Delay until repeat
o Repeat rate
o Test here
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Sticky keys
o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Settings Activation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to activate the specified settings, input methods, and
sticky keys.

 1. Select the On radio button to change or make the settings and sticky keys
    input methods active.
 2. Press and hold the Shift key for five seconds, until you have heard two
    beeps.

    The first beep indicates that settings are about to be activated. The
    second beep indicates that the settings are active.

For information about Sticky keys, refer to the "Related Information" list.

Select the Off radio button to turn off the settings, input methods, and sticky
keys.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments
o Sticky keys


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Settings Time-Out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to specify how long settings remain active when the keyboard
is not being used. (The system beeps when the specified time expires.) Drag the
slider arm from left to right to adjust the rate from 0 to 30 minutes.

The time can be adjusted from Short (0) to Long (30 minutes). Zero (short)
indicates that the setting will not time out automatically, but must be
manually turned off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Acceptance Delay ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to specify how long a key must be held down before it is
accepted as a pressed key.  Drag the slider arm from left to right to adjust
the delay from Short (0 seconds) to Long (10 seconds).

A short acceptance delay (for example, 2 seconds) indicates that the key must
be pressed and held down for 2 seconds before the system accepts it as a
keystroke.  When the value of this field is greater than short (0), the system
generates a short, single beep for each accepted keystroke.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delay Until Repeat ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to specify how long a pressed key must be held down before
it begins repeating its function.  Drag the slider arm from left to right to
adjust the rate from Short (0 seconds) to Long (10 seconds).

A value of short (0 seconds) indicates that a key will not repeat its function
at all.  A specified value (for example, 1 second) indicates that the key will
begin to repeat its function 1 second after the system accepts it as a
keystroke.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Repeat Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to specify the rate at which a key will repeat its function
when it is held down.  Drag the slider arm from left to right to adjust the
rate from Short (0 seconds) to Long (10 seconds).

A value of short (0 seconds) indicates that the key will repeat at the standard
rate.  A specified value (for example, 3 seconds), indicates that the key will
repeat its function every 3 seconds after the the keystroke has been accepted
and the specified delay until repeat value has been satisfied.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Test Here ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to experiment with the settings:

 1. Move the cursor to the Test here field.
 2. Press and hold the Shift key for five seconds, until you have heard two
    beeps.

    The first beep indicates that settings are about to be activated. The
    second beep indicates that the settings are active.


 3. Type characters in the Test here field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Settings activation
o Settings timeout
o Acceptance delay
o Delay until repeat
o Repeat rate
o Sticky keys
o Test here
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sticky Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This feature lets you press and release a series of keys one at a time and have
the computer behave as if the keys were pressed at the same time; for example,
to restart the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or to display Window List by
pressing Ctrl+Esc.

To activate sticky keys:

 1. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
 2. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift 3 times; then
    press the key you want stuck down one time.
 3. Repeat step 2 for each key that you want to behave as a sticky key.

For example, to display Window List (Ctrl+Esc):

 1. Press Shift 3 times.
 2. Press Ctrl.
 3. Press Esc.

In the example above, Ctrl is the sticky key.

To deactivate sticky keys: Press and release each sticky key one time.

You can deactivate sticky keys at any time without returning to the Special
Needs settings.

Related Information:

o Sticky keys
o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for On ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select On to turn on the specified special needs settings and input methods.

 1. Select the On radio button.
 2. Press and hold the Shift key for five seconds, until you have heard two
    beeps.

    The first beep indicates that settings are about to be activated. The
    second beep indicates that the settings are active.

For information about Sticky keys, refer to the "Related Information" list.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments
o Sticky keys


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Off radio button to turn off special needs settings and input
methods.

Related Information:

o Changing keyboard mappings
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Help for Productivity Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Productivity folder to select programs that can assist you in editing
text and icons, keeping a diary, creating charts and drawings, searching for
files or text, displaying system utilization, and using a terminal emulator.
The folder contains such programs as:

Alarms
            A program that enables you to set alarms to go off during the day.
Activities List
            A list of entries from the Daily Planner.
Calculator
            A program that you can use to perform mathematical calculations.
Calendar
            A program that enables you to look at a day, month, and year of
            your choice.
Clipboard Viewer
            An application that enables you to view the contents of the OS/2*
            clipboard.
Daily Planner
            A program that enables you to keep track of your past and future
            activities.
Database
            A program that enables you to keep a miniature database.
Data Update
            A program to dynamically exchange information between running
            programs within OS/2* or between OS/2 and Windows**.
Enhanced Editor
            An editor you can use to create and edit text files.  It enables
            you to work on multiple files at the same time.
Icon Editor
            A tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image files.
            These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers.
Monthly Planner
            A summary of the monthly activities.
Note Pad
            A convenient place to keep personal notes.
Planner Archive
            A list of entries that were archived with the Daily Planner.
PM Chart
            A chart-making program.  You can easily create exciting business
            presentations, charts, and drawings.
Pulse
            A system monitor.  This displays the amount of system time various
            programs use with the processor.
Seek and Scan Files
            A program to quickly search one or more disks for files or text.
PM Terminal
            A communications program.  This emulates terminals and allows for
            data transfer between two computers.  It requires a modem.
Spreadsheet
            A spreadsheet program.
Sticky Pad
            A place to keep small reminder notes that "stick" to one of the
            four corners of the monitor.
To-Do List
            A program that enables you to plan your day by prioritizing the
            daily activities.
To-Do List Archive
            A list of entries that were archived with the To-Do List.
Tune Editor
            A program that enables you to create and edit tunes to be used with
            the Alarm.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.

If you did not install the above programs, and would like to do so, select
Adding options after installation in the "Related Information" list. Related
Information:

Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Help for Games Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Games folder to select programs that you can use for entertainment, and
that can assist you in familiarizing yourself with the OS/2* operating system
by playing a variety of familiar and new games.  The folder contains such
programs as:

Cat and Mouse
            A game to help you learn how to use the mouse.
Jigsaw
            A video puzzle you can solve.  It allows you to move the pieces of
            the puzzle in any direction. You can select from the available
            pictures or use your own pictures.
Klondike Solitaire
            A popular card game for one person.
OS/2 Chess
            A game of chess that you may play against another person on the
            same computer, on a network, or against the computer.
Reversi
            A board game that requires skill and strategy.
Scramble
            A small video puzzle you can solve.  It allows you to move the
            pieces of the puzzle in one direction at a time. You can select
            from the available pictures.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.

If you did not install the above programs, and would like to do so, select
Adding options after installation in the "Related Information" list. Related
Information:

Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Help for Information Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the objects in the Information folder to learn more about the OS/2*
operating system's features.  Depending on the installation choices you
selected, the Information folder contains such objects as:

o Tutorial
o Glossary
o Command Reference
o REXX Information.

If any programs you use provide online documents, you can add them to the
Information folder.

You can drag the objects to the desktop, so they are handy for reference as you
learn about the operating system.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.

Related Information:

o Adding online documentation after installation
o Opening a folder
o Selecting an object
o Finding an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Help for Tutorial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Tutorial for an overview of the OS/2* operating system.  Each topic in the
Tutorial provides some animation and user interaction.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Index and Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Master Help Index or Glossary to get an alphabetic list of OS/2* operating
system tasks, concepts and terms used in describing each object and folder on
the desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Index and Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Master Help Index to display a list of OS/2* operating system tasks and
concepts.  Use Glossary to display a list of commonly used terms.

To display a help topic or a definition, double-click on the entry you want
from the notebook list.  If you want to view more entries, select a letter tab,
use the scroll bar, or press a key that corresponds to the first letter of an
entry.  (To display additional tabs, select the double-arrows below the
notebook tabs.)

In all cases, if the entry does not fit in the list box, you can use the left
or right arrow at the bottom of the list box to adjust the entry to the right
or left.

You also can use the search feature to locate a topic, and the print feature if
you need a hard copy.  For information on these features, select the topic
below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting an object
o Searching Master Help Index topics
o Searching Glossary definitions
o Printing a Master Help Index topic
o Printing a Glossary topic


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Search to find a word, phrase, or topic. All occurrences of your search are
then displayed.

To search:

 1. Type the word, phrase, or topic you want to search for in the Search string
    field.
 2. Select the Search push button.
 3. Select an entry in the Matched items list box.

Note:   Search locates only the entries which contain the topics, words, or
        phrases you put in the Search string field, or the synonyms for those
        entries.  When you select one of the items in the Matched items list
        box you will see a topic or definition related to that item.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Search string
o Matched items
o Search
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting an object
o Searching Glossary definitions
o Printing a Master Help Index topic
o Printing a Glossary definition


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search String ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type the word, phrase, or topic you want to search for in the Search string
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Matched Items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select an entry in the Matched items list box.

In all cases, if the entry does not fit in the index window, you can use the
left or right arrow at the bottom of the notebook to adjust the entry to the
right or left.

Note:   Search locates only the entries which contain the words or phrases you
        put in the Search string field, or the synonyms for those entries.
        When you select one of the items in the Matched items list box you will
        see a help topic related to that item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Print topic to print the index help topic or glossary definition
currently displayed.

All of the pages for the help topic or definition are printed. For example, if
the page currently displayed is one of three pages of information; then all
three pages are printed.

This choice is not selectable, when an index help topic or glossary definition
is not displayed.

Note:   Selecting the Print push button below the displayed topic is not
        recommended.  Printing the entire Master Help Index or Glossary files
        requires an extremely large amount of printer time.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting an object
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Searching the Glossary


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Help for Print Topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Print topic push button to print the index help topic or glossary
definition displayed.

All of the pages for the help topic or definition are printed. For example, if
the page currently displayed is one of three pages of information; then all
three pages are printed.

This choice is not selectable, when an index help topic or glossary definition
is not displayed.

Note:   Selecting the Print push button below the displayed topic is not
        recommended.  Printing the entire Master Help Index or Glossary files
        requires an extremely large amount of printer time.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting an object
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Searching the Glossary


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Properties Help Pushbutton Glossary and Index

Properties fields let you change the name of the selected object, list a series
of files so that they are treated as a group of files linked together, or
specify an environment variable set to a path. For a detailed explanation of
each field, select from the list below:

o Title
o Files/Environment name
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to change the current name of the selected object, or to
create a name for it. Type the new name in the Title field and erase any
previous title.

The new name is then displayed below the icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Files/Environment Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to:

o List and link a series of help files, for example:


           C:\MYDIR\XXX.HLP+C:\YOURDIR\YYY.HELP+C:\THEIRDIR\ZZZ.HLP.


o Specify an environment variable set to a path, for example:


           SET HELP = bppt=drove\OS2\HELP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Previous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Previous to return to the previous panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Tutorial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Tutorial if you want to go to the Tutorial for more information about
this topic.

For some topics the Tutorial push button takes you to the particular section of
the Tutorial.  When finished, select the Exit push button to return you to the
Master Help Index.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Search to find the words, phrases, or entries you typed in the Search
string field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Search topics to find the entries that contain specified words or phrases,
or their synonyms.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Selecting an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select List to open the Master Help Index or Glossary and see an alphabetic
list of words, topics, and phrases.

Related Information:

o Opening an object
o Printing a Master Help Index topic
o Printing a Glossary definition
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Searching the Glossary
o Selecting an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create Another fields to:

o Make another object and create a name for it.
o List a series of files so that they are treated as a group of files linked
  together.
o Specify an environment variable set to a path.
For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Title
o Files/Environment name
o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Another to:

o Make another object and create a name for it.
o List a series of files so that they are treated as a group of files linked
  together.
o Specify an environment variable set to a path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Help for Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Window List to:

o Select or switch to windows for open objects and active programs.
o Close or end windows for open objects and active programs.
o Arrange the windows of open objects and active programs on the desktop.
o Display opened windows for objects and active programs in Window List.
o Hide or show groups and windows for open objects and active programs.
o See a list of windows that you minimized.

You cannot close the desktop from Window List.  You have to follow the shutdown
process.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Showing hidden windows
o Hiding open windows
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Closing windows
o Tiling windows
o Cascading windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of Select to display a menu that enables you to
select or deselect all windows for open objects and active programs. Then, when
you display and select the items in the Window List pop-up menu, your selection
affects all windows.

Show
          Enables you to see all hidden windows and places all windows on the
          desktop in the order in which they appear in Window List.
Tile
          Changes the size of all open windows and arranges them so they appear
          side-by-side on the desktop.  The active window is in the upper-left
          corner.
Cascade
          Places open windows in a staircase-like arrangement, with the active
          window closest.
Close
          Closes all the windows of open objects and active programs and ends
          the programs.

          Note:   This feature is program-dependent.  Some programs do not
                  automatically save settings when closed.

          When you close a session, every program and open window view is
          automatically closed, you may lose data. Before you close a session,
          save all information in its programs and windows.
Print
          Displays a pop-up menu that enables you to select the printer to
          which you will send the contents of all objects or active programs
          for printing.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Show
o Hide
o Tile
o Cascade
o Close
o Print

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Close to end programs and close objects and to close all associated
windows.

When you close a session, every program and open window view in that session is
automatically closed; you may lose data. Before you close a session, save all
information in its programs and windows.

Select the objects and programs you want to close or end, then select Close.

You cannot close the Desktop folder from Window List.  You have to follow the
OS/2* operating system shutdown process.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Shutting down the operating system
o Switching between sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Hide to make windows on the desktop invisible and add their names to the
Window List.  Hide enables you to keep your desktop orderly.  If there are no
visible windows, Hide is not selectable.

Select the windows you want to hide, then select Hide.

To see hidden windows one at a time, select the window from the Window List;
then, double-click on on its name.

To see hidden windows, select them from Window List, then select Show.

If you prefer objects minimized on the desktop rather than listed in Window
List, you can customize the hide feature.  Refer to Customizing window behavior
in the "Related Information" list.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Showing hidden windows
o Customizing window behavior


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Show ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Show to switch to windows of highlighted open objects, and active programs.
Show also makes selected hidden windows visible on the desktop and places them
in front of all the other open windows in the order in which they appear in
Window List.

When there are no hidden windows, Show is not selectable.

Select the program and object windows you want to see, then select Show.

To hide visible windows, select them from Window List, then select Hide.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Hiding windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Tile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Tile to arrange windows on the desktop.  Tile changes the size of windows
and arranges them so they appear side-by-side on the desktop, with the
last-used window in the upper-left corner.

Select the program and object windows you want to arrange, then select Tile.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Cascading windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cascade ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Cascade to arrange windows on the desktop.  Cascade places selected open
windows in a staircase-like arrangement, with the last-used window closest.

Select the program and object windows you want to arrange, then select Cascade.

Related Information:

o Selecting windows
o Tiling windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Select All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Select all to select every open window in Window List. This enables you to:

o Arrange the windows on the desktop by selecting tile or cascade.
o Close all windows at one time.
o Print the contents of each window at one time.
o Hide all windows at one time.
o Show all windows at one time.

You can choose Deselect all when you complete any of the tasks above and return
to Window List.

Related Information: Selecting an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Deselect All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Deselect all to cancel the Select all choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Redo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Redo to repeat the last selection.  Redo reverses your last Undo selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Undo to cancel the last selection.  You can reverse Undo actions by
selecting Redo.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Help for System Clock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use System Clock to set the system clock or to set an alarm.  You then can
display the clock in different views (for example, analog or digital, with or
without the system date).

 1. Display the pop-up menu for System clock.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the choices in the Settings notebook to change the system time and date,
set an alarm, or change the colors and font of the clock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View: Page 1 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select from the radio buttons in the Information and Mode fields to specify how
the system clock is displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Time only
o Date only
o Both date and time
o Digital
o Analog
o Second hand
o Hour marks
o Minute marks
o Show title bar
o Undo
o Default

You can perform other tasks from View page 2.  Select the right arrow at the
bottom of the window to see View page 2.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View: Page 2 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select from the radio buttons in the Color and Font fields to specify how the
system clock is displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Background
o Face
o Hour and minute marks
o Seconds hand
o Change color
o Date
o Time
o Change font
o Undo
o Default

You can perform other tasks from View page 1.  Select the left arrow at the
bottom of the window to see View page 1.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Time Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Time only to display the time without the date.  Select the type of
display you want (Analog or Digital).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Date only to display the date without the time.  Date only can be
selected when the clock is displayed in a digital view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Both Date and Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Both date and time to display both the date and time.  Both date and
time can be selected when the clock is displayed in a digital view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Digital ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Digital to display the time on the clock in numbers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Analog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Analog to display the time with hour and minute marks and a second hand.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hour Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to display the analog clock with hour marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Minute Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to display the analog clock with minute marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Second Hand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to display the analog clock with a second hand.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Show Title Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to indicate that the clock will be displayed with a title
bar, title bar symbol, hide button, and maximize button.

When Show title bar is not selected, the clock is displayed in a window with a
border.

Related Information:

Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Background to indicate that you want to change the background color of
the clock with Change color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Face ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Face to indicate that you want to change the color of the clock-face
with Change color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hour and Minute Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Hours and Minutes to indicate that you want to change the color of the
hour and minute marks with Change color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Seconds Hand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Seconds Hand to indicate that you want to change the color of the clock
hands with Change color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change color to view the colors you can select for the parts of the
clock.

 1. Select the radio button in the Color section to indicate the part of the
    clock you want to change.
 2. Select Change color.
 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to change other parts of the clock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Date to indicate that you want to change the font of the date with
Change font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Time to indicate that you want to change the font of the time with
Change font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change font to view the variety of fonts you can select for the date and
time on the clock.

 1. Select one of the radio buttons in the Font section to indicate what part
    of the clock you want to change.
 2. Select Change font.
 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to change the other part of the clock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the choices in the Date/Time notebook to change the current date and time
settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Date/Time to change the current date and time settings.

 1. Select the part of the time or date that is incorrect, then use the arrows
    to adjust the setting.
 2. When finished, select another area of the Date and Time window.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Hours
o AM/PM
o Minutes
o Seconds
o Month
o Day
o Year

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the hour that is currently displayed on the system clock.  To
change it, use the arrows to the right.  To change the AM/PM designation,
select either the AM or PM radio button. When you finish, select another area
of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for AM/PM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the setting on the system clock.  To change the a.m. or p.m.
designation, select either the AM or PM radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Minutes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the minutes that are currently displayed on the system clock.
To change them, use the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another
area of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Seconds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the seconds that are currently displayed on the system clock.
To change them, use the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another
area of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Month ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the month of the year that is currently displayed on the
system clock.  To change it, use the arrows to the right.  When you finish,
select another area of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Day ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the day of the week that is currently displayed on the system
clock.  To change it, use the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select
another area of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Year ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the year that is currently displayed on the system clock.  To
change it, use the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area
of the Date/Time window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Alarm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Alarm to turn the alarm on or off, and to select an audio or visual
(Message box) indicator.

To change the alarm time or date, select the one that is incorrect; then use
the arrows to adjust the settings.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Alarm on
o Alarm off
o Audio alarm
o Message box
o Hour
o AM/PM
o Minutes
o Seconds
o Month
o Day
o Year
o Undo

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Alarm On ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Alarm on to have a reminder sent when the alarm time and date are equal
to the time and date on the system clock.  Then, select Audio alarm or Message
box to specify the type of reminder you want to receive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Alarm Off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Alarm off to specify that no reminder is to be sent when the alarm time
and date are equal to the time and date on the system clock.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Audio Alarm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to sound an alarm at a desired time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Message Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to display an alarm message at a desired time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the alarm hour currently set.  To change it, use the arrows to
the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Minutes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the alarm minutes currently set.  To change them, use the
arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Seconds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the alarm seconds currently set.  To change them, use the
arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Month ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the month the alarm is currently set for.  To change it, use
the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Day ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the day the alarm is currently set for.  To change it, use the
arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Year ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the year the alarm is currently set for.  To change it, use
the arrows to the right.  When you finish, select another area of the Alarm
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Help for Selective Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Selective Install to change the mouse, display adapter, or country
information for your system.  You can also use Selective Install to add
features that you did not include when you originally installed the operating
system. For example, if you did not install the online documentation, you can
add it now.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. Help for Device Driver Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Device Driver Install if you are installing a device that comes with a
Device Support Diskette.  The Device Support Diskette contains program files
that enable the device to communicate with the operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Help for Alarms ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Alarms to set alarms to go off during the day.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Help for Activities List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Activities List to view the summary list of events from the Daily Planner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Help for Calculator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Calculator to perform mathematical calculations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Help for Calendar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Calendar to look at a day, month, and year of your choice.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Help for Clipboard Viewer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Clipboard Viewer to view the contents of the OS/2* clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Help for Daily Planner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Daily Planner to keep track of your past and future activities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Help for Database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Database to keep a miniature database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Help for Enhanced Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Enhanced Editor to create and edit text files.  It also enables you to work
on multiple files at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Help for Icon Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Icon Editor to create, edit, and convert image files.  These files include
icons, bit maps, and pointers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. Help for Monthly Planner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Monthly Planner to display a summary of the monthly activities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Help for Note Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Note Pad as a convenient place to keep personal notes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Help for Planner Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Planner Archive to display a list of entries which were archived with the
Daily Planner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Help for Presentation Manager Chart (PM Chart) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use PM Chart to create business presentations.  You can easily create charts,
graphs, symbols and drawings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Help for Pulse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Pulse to display the amount of time various programs use the processor.  It
is a system monitor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. Help for Seek and Scan Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Seek and Scan to quickly search one or more disks for files or text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Help for PM Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use PM Terminal to emulate terminals and allow for data transfer between two
computers.  It is a communications program which requires a modem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. Help for Spreadsheet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Spreadsheet to use a spreadsheet for purposes of keeping track of monthly
expenditures, track sales figures, or track any other numbers, as examples.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Help for Sticky Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Sticky Pad as a place to keep small reminder notes that "stick" to one of
the four corners of the monitor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Help for To-Do List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use To-Do List to plan your day by prioritizing the daily activities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. Help for To-Do List Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use To-Do List Archive to view the list of entries that were archived with the
To-Do List.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Help for Tune Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Tune Editor to create and edit tunes to be used with the Alarm.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Help for Cat and Mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Cat and Mouse to help you learn how to use the mouse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Help for Jigsaw ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Jigsaw to solve a video puzzle.  It allows you to move the pieces of the
puzzle in any direction.  You can select from the available pictures or use
your own pictures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Help for Klondike Solitaire ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Klondike Solitaire to play a popular card game for one person.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Help for OS/2 Chess ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use OS/2 Chess to play a game of chess.  You may play against another person on
the same computer, on a network, or against the computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Help for Reversi ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Reversi to play a board game that requires skill and strategy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. Help for Scramble ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Scramble to solve a small video puzzle.  It allows you to move the pieces
of the puzzle in one direction at a time.  You can select from the available
pictures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Help for Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The desktop is a folder object that represents the top of your desk.  It has
objects that you can move around and work with.

Use the choices in the pop-up menu for the desktop to do such tasks as:

o Arranging the icons on the desktop
o Finding an object
o Locking the keyboard and mouse
o Shutting down the operating system
o Changing the characteristics of the desktop folder
o Specifying settings for options such as colors and fonts

Use the Desktop - Settings notebook  to change the characteristics (settings)
of the Desktop folder.  For example, you might want to view the objects
differently.  You might want to display the objects in a vertical list with or
without icons.  For more information about using the Desktop - Settings
notebook, select Changing settings of objects from the "Related Information"
list below.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Shut Down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Shut down to be sure your information is saved when you turn off your
computer.

Warning:  You might lose information if you turn off your computer without
doing the shutdown procedure.

Check all OS/2* and DOS sessions for unsaved information before you start the
shutdown.

The operating system:

o Saves any information that is in a cache
o Saves the size and location of windows and icons
o Displays any messages that your active programs display when you close them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the objects in the OS/2 System folder to perform such tasks as:

o Working with a hard disk or diskette
o Displaying a command prompt
o Specifying how fast the keyboard or mouse works, how the screen looks, or how
  the operating system starts
o Using various programs and games.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for General ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the name of the selected object by typing a new name in the
Title field.  You can change the picture (icon) that represents this object by
using the Create another, Edit, or Find push buttons.  Or you can change the
icon by dragging and dropping the icon of another object onto the icon in the
Current icon field of this page.

You also can create a template of the object.  Then each time you drag a copy
from the template, you create a new folder that has the same settings as the
original object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Title
o Current icon
o Create another
o Edit
o Find
o Template
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for General ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the name of the desktop folder by typing a new name in the Title
field.  You can change the picture (icon) that represents the desktop by using
the Create another, Edit, or Find push buttons.  Or you can change the icon by
dragging and dropping the icon of another object onto the Desktop icon in the
Current icon field of this page.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Title
o Current icon
o Create another
o Edit
o Find
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Title field displays the name of the selected object  This name is
displayed with the icon.  Type in this field to change the title.

Your new title can be displayed on one or more lines below the icon.  Press the
Enter key as you type a new title to indicate the start of a new line.  You can
use any characters, including spaces, except the backslash (\).

You also can change the name of the object by typing a new name below the icon.
To learn how to do this, select the topic below.

Note:   If you select Default, the title is removed and replaced with the name
        of the object type, for example, Folder, Program, or Data File.

Related Information:

Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Current Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Current icon field shows which picture (icon) is being displayed with this
object.  You can use the push buttons to the right of this field to change the
current icon or select a different one.  Or you can change the icon by dragging
and dropping the icon of another object onto the icon in the Current icon
field.

Initially the icon is determined by the operating system or a program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create another to use the Icon Editor to make a new icon for the
selected object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit if you want to change the icon that is displayed in the Current
icon field.  This icon is the one that is displayed with this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find to locate the names of program-file objects that create other
icons.  You can use one of those icons to replace the current icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File: Page 1 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can type a description of the object in the Subject field.  You can define
this object as a work area by selecting Work area.  You can view the name of
the file object and its path and file name.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Subject
o Physical name
o Work area
o Undo

You can perform other tasks from File pages 2 or 3.  Select the right arrow at
the bottom of the window to see File page 2.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File: Page 1 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can type a description of the object in the Subject field.  You can view
the name of the file object and its path and file name.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Subject
o Physical name
o Undo

  You can perform other tasks from File pages 2 or 3.  Select the right arrow
  at the bottom of the window to see File page 2.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Physical Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Physical name box shows where the selected object is located.  The path and
file name of the selected object are shown in the Path and Name fields.

For example, assume you have an editor named ABC which is started from the
program file named ABC.EXE.  It is in a folder you created and named EDITOR.
When you first select the File tab, the Physical name box contains the
following:

   Path: \OS2\EDITOR
   Name: ABC.EXE

You cannot change the information in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to use the selected object to create a new object with
the same settings.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice is
selected.

After you set the template option, you can drag a copy of the selected object
and drop it in a new location (in the Command Prompts folder, on the desktop,
or in any other folder).  Then you can change the name of the object and add an
icon.  For more information, select Changing names of objects or Changing the
icon for an object in the list below.

Whenever you create a template object, the name of the object is added to the
pop-up menu for all objects that have a Create another choice on their pop-up
menu.  To view the names of the templates you have created, display a pop-up
menu and select the arrow to the right of Create another.

Select Examples to see how the icon for the object changes after you select
Template.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Changing the icon for an object
o Dragging an object
o Creating another object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Work Area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to designate a special setting for the selected folder.
The folder then becomes a work-area folder in which you can place objects that
are related to a specific task.  For example, you might create a work-area
folder to include a current report, previous reports, and a printer with
customized settings; or, you might create a work-area folder to include charts,
documents, and a plotter.

Work-area folders have two special features.  When you close the folder, all
windows belonging to the objects within the folder are closed automatically and
the view of each object is saved.  When you open the folder the next time, the
windows for the objects in the folder are displayed with their previous view.
The other feature is that when you hide the window of a work-area folder, all
windows belonging to the objects in the folder are hidden automatically.  When
you show the work-area folder (from the Window List), the windows for the
objects in the folder are displayed with their previous view.

If you minimize a work-area folder, only the icon for the work-area folder is
displayed in the Minimized Window Viewer or on the desktop.  The windows
belonging to the objects in the work-area folder are not displayed.

Work-area folders function with the icon or details view, but not with the tree
view.

Related Information:

Dragging an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File: Page 2 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can assign or change flags for the object by selecting one or more check
boxes in the Flags field.  You can view the size of the object and the dates it
was created, modified, and last used.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Date/Time
o Size
o Flags
o Read-only
o Archive
o Hidden
o System
o Undo

You can perform other tasks from File pages 1 or 3.  Select the right or left
arrow at the bottom of the window to see File page 1 or 3.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File: Page 2 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can assign or change flags for the object by selecting one or more check
boxes in the Flags field.  You can view the size of the object and the dates it
was created, modified, and last used.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Date/Time
o Size
o Flags
o Read-only
o Archive
o Hidden
o System
o Undo

You can perform other tasks from File pages 2 or 3.  Select the right or left
arrow at the bottom of the window to see page 1 or 3.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Subject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type a brief summary about the contents of the selected object in the Subject
field.  You can type as many as 40 characters.

For example, assume you use a word processor to create several data-file
objects that contain summaries of business meetings.  You can type the words
business meetings in the Subject field for each of those objects.

The information you type becomes part of the extended attributes for the
object.  Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word
processor might categorize files according to the information in the Subject
field.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes

Note:   This field is optional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Date and Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Created, Last changed, and Last accessed fields contain date and time
information that is provided by the operating system.  You cannot change this
information.

The date and time information is part of the extended attributes for the
object.  Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word
processor might categorize files according to the information in the Date/Time
fields.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Size field contains information that is provided by the operating system.

Contents indicates the number of objects in the folder and the size, in bytes.,
of all those objects.

Extended attributes indicates the size, in bytes, of additional information
about the object.  You cannot change the size information.

The size information is part of the extended attributes for the object.  A
program might use this information.  For example, a word processor might
categorize files according to the information in the Size fields.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Size field contains information that is provided by the operating system.

Contents indicates the size, in bytes., of the selected data-file object or a
program-file object.

Extended attributes indicates the size, in bytes, of additional information
about the object.  You cannot change the size information.

The size information is part of the extended attributes for the object.  A
program might use this information.  For example, a word processor might
categorize files according to the information in the Size fields.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Flags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more check boxes to indicate which attributes (flags) apply to
the selected object.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice is
selected.

The flags are read-only, archive, hidden, and system.

Warning:  If you select read-only, hidden, and system for a folder, that folder
will not be displayed the next time you start the system after performing the
shutdown procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Read-Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to specify whether or not the selected object can be read
but not changed.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice is
selected.

Warning:  If you select read-only, hidden, and system for a folder, that folder
will not be displayed the next time you start the system after performing the
shutdown procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to specify whether or not the BACKUP, RESTORE, COPY, and
XCOPY commands work on the selected object.  A check mark in the check box
indicates the choice is selected.

For more information about those commands, refer to the OS/2 Command Reference.
If you have not installed the Command Reference, select Adding online
documentation after installation in the list below.

Related Information:

o Using commands
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hidden ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to specify whether or not the selected object is
displayed in a Tree view.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice
is selected.

Warning:  If you select read-only, hidden, and system for a folder, that folder
will not be displayed the next time you start the system after performing the
shutdown procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to specify whether or not the selected object is part of
the operating system.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice is
selected.

Warning:  If you select read-only, hidden, and system for a folder, that folder
will not be displayed the next time you start the system after performing the
shutdown procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File: Page 3 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can type text about the selected object in the Comments and Key Phrases
fields.  The History field displays a chronological record of the object.

Any information on Page 3 is part of the extended attributes for the object.
Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word processor
might categorize files according to the information in one of the fields.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes from the "Related Information" list below.

Warning:  If you select read-only, hidden, and system for a folder, that folder
will not be displayed the next time you start the system after performing the
shutdown procedure.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Comments
o Key phrases
o History
o Undo

You can perform other tasks from File pages 1 or 2.  Select the left arrow at
the bottom of the window to see File page 2.

Related Information:

o Files with extended attributes
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type any notes about the selected object in the Comments field.

The information you type becomes part of the extended attributes for the
object.  Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word
processor might categorize files according to the information in the Comments
field.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.

Note:   This field is optional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Key Phrases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type any words you want to use to identify the selected object in the Key
phrases field.

The information you type becomes part of the extended attributes for the
object.  Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word
processor might categorize files according to the information in the Key
Phrases field.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.

Note:   This field is optional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for History ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The History field is the record of an object that is provided by the program or
the operating system.  You cannot change this information.

Any information in this field is part of the extended attributes for the
object.  Later, a program might use this information.  For example, a word
processor might categorize files according to the information in the History
field.

For more information about extended attributes, select Files with extended
attributes.

Note:   This field is optional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can assign one or more file types to describe the selected data-file object
or program-file object.

To assign file types to an object, select types from Available types and then
select Add.  Those types are then displayed in Current types.

To delete file-type assignments from an object, select types from Current types
and then select Remove.

You can use file types to associate a group of similar files to a program
object.  For example, you can associate all your Plain Text files to the
program object for your spreadsheet program.  Or you can associate all Plain
Text files to another editor, for example, the Enhanced Editor.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Available types
o Current types
o Add
o Remove
o Undo

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Available Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the file types that can be assigned to the selected
data-file object or program-file object.

Select one or more types in this list and then select Add to assign types and
display them in Current types.

You can use file types to associate a group of similar files to a program
object.  For example, you can associate all your Plain Text files to the
program object for your spreadsheet program.  Or you can associate all Plain
Text files to another editor, for example, the Enhanced Editor.

Later, you can use the Include procedure to identify objects that have specific
types assigned to them, as listed in Current types.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Current Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the file types that are assigned to the selected data-file
object or program-file object.

To delete file-type assignments from the object, select one or more types from
Current types and then select Remove.  To add new types, select types from
Available types and then select Add.

You can use file types to associate a group of similar files to a program
object.  For example, you can associate all your Plain Text files to the
program object for your spreadsheet program.  Or you can associate all Plain
Text files to another editor, for example, the Enhanced Editor.

Later, you can use the Include procedure to identify objects that have specific
types assigned to them, as listed in Current types.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to assign the selected file types to the object and to include the
types in the Current types list.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Remove ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Remove to delete the selected file-type association from the object and
to remove the selected types from the Current types list.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Association ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Association to create a special link (an association) between this program
object and one or more data-file objects.  Then you can open a data-file object
and display it in this program object in one step.

To create an association with the selected program object:

 1. Select one or more types from Available types.
 2. Select Add.

Or:

 1. Type one or more file names in the New name field.
 2. Select Add.

You can use global file-name characters as a substitute for part of a file
name.  For example, you can link this program object to all data-file objects
that have the extension DOC by typing the following in the New name field:

   *.DOC

If this is the only program object that is linked to a specific data-file
object, the following happens when you select the data-file object.  This
program object is opened and the selected data-file object is displayed, ready
to use.

If there is now more than one program associated to this file and you want the
new program object to be the default, select Making a menu item the default
action in the list below.

Some links might have been added by the operating system or a program.  For
example, a spreadsheet program might link a specific file-name extension to the
program object.  Then each time you open the data-file object that represents
the data file with that extension, the spreadsheet object is opened and the
data file is displayed in the spreadsheet.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Available types
o Current types
o New name
o Current names
o Add
o Remove
o Undo

Related Information:

o Global file-name characters
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Available Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the file types that can be associated to the selected
program object.

Select one or more types in this list and then select Add to associate those
file types to the program object and to display those file types in Current
types.  Also, the name of this program object is listed in the pop-up menu of
every data-file object that has the type or types you added to Current types.
Then you can select an associated data-file object and display it in this
program object, instead of in the default program object, the OS/2 System
Editor.

For example, assume that you want to be able to display your data-file objects
in the Enhanced Editor, instead of in the default OS/2 System Editor.  You
would display the settings notebook for the Enhanced Editor, select
Association, select Plain Text in Available types, and then select the Add
pushbutton.  Then Plain Text would be added to Current types on the Association
page and Enhanced Editor would be added to the pop-up menu for every data-file
object.  To use the Enhanced Editor with a plain-text data-file object , you
would select the data-file object, display the pop-up menu, select Open, and
select Enhanced Editor.  Or, you can make the Enhanced Editor the default
editor for one or more of your plain-text data-file objects.  For more
information, select Making a menu item the default action in the list below.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Current Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the file types that are associated to the selected program
object.  Any data-file object that has a file type in Current types can be
selected and displayed in this program object.  If, however, the data-file
object is associated previously to another program object, you must change the
default association to this program object.  For example, the OS/2 System
Editor is the default for all data-file objects.  If you associate a data-file
object to the Enhanced Editor, you must change the default program object.  For
more information, select Making a menu item the default action in the following
list.

To delete file-type assignments from the object, select one or more types from
Current types and then select Remove.  To add new types, select types from
Available types and then select Add.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Current Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the names of any file types that are currently linked
(associated) to the selected program object.

To add one or more file names to this list:

 1. Type a file name in the New name field.
 2. Select Add.

You can use global file-name characters as a substitute for part of a file
name.  For example, you can type *.DOC.

To delete one or more file names from the Current names list:

 1. Select the file names in Current names.
 2. Select Remove.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Global file-name characters
o Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for New Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type the name of one or more file names in the New name field to link
(associate) those file names to the selected program object.  Then select Add
to display the file names in the Current names list.

You can use global file-name characters as a substitute for part of a file
name.  For example, you can link this program object to all data-file objects
that have the extension DOC by typing the following in the New name field:

   *.DOC

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the "Related
Information" list.

Related Information:

o Global file-name characters
o Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify parameters or a working directory for the selected object by
typing in the Parameters or Working directory field.  When you do this, you
control how the program starts each time you open the program object.

Specifying this information is optional.  Refer to the information that came
with the program to learn if a working directory is required or what parameters
you can use.

For example, if you use an editor, the program might enable you to define a
parameter through which the editor will always start with a NOTABS option.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Path and file name
o Parameters
o Working directory
o Undo

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Path and File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Path and file name field indicates the location of the program-file object
that starts the selected program object.  If this program object was created
from a template, the field is empty.  If the information is not correct or the
field is empty, type the correct path and file name, for example:

   \EDITOR\ABC.EXE

If this program object is for a command-prompt session, you can type an
asterisk (*) in this field.  That enables you to choose whether you want the
command-prompt session to be DOS window, DOS full screen, OS/2 window, or OS/2
full screen.  You also can type an * in this field if you want to choose
WIN-OS/2 full screen as a session.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type any parameters that the selected program object or program-file object
needs when it starts or that you want the program object to use when it is
opened.

Not all program objects need parameters when they are opened.  The
documentation for the program should tell you if the program object needs any
parameters and how to use them.

You might need to use a parameter to start a program from the pop-up menu of a
folder object.  For more information about this and other uses of parameters,
select the topic below.

Related Information:

Parameters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Working Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:   Specifying a path to the working directory is optional unless you are
        directed to do so in the documentation that came with the program.

Type a path to the working directory if you want to store files created with
this program in a directory different from the one in which the program-file
object resides.  The path consists of all directories that must be opened to
get to the working directory.

For example, assume you have an editor ABC in the EDIT directory on drive C.
When you use ABC, you save your created data files in the DOCUMENT
subdirectory.  Each time the operating system starts ABC from the program
object, the working directory is the EDIT directory.  Therefore, every time you
want to work with one of your files, you have to type the path to the DOCUMENT
subdirectory.

Instead, you can type the path to the DOCUMENT subdirectory in the Working
directory field.  Then each time you open the program object for the editor,
the operating system changes the working directory from the EDIT directory to
the DOCUMENT subdirectory, where your data files are stored.

Using the previous example, you would type the following in the Working
directory field:

  \edit\document

Note:   If the path in the Working directory field is not valid, you might
        receive a warning message from the operating system when you try to
        open the program object.  To recover from that error, return to this
        notebook page and either correct or delete the path in the Working
        directory field.

Related Information:

File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the appropriate session for this OS/2*, DOS, or Windows** program
object.

Select DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 settings if it is available and your DOS or
Windows program does not run the same in the OS/2 operating system as it does
in DOS.  For more information, about settings, select Migrating programs or
Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the "Related Information" list below.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OS/2 full screen
o OS/2 window
o DOS window
o DOS full screen
o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o Separate session
o Start minimized
o Close window on exit
o DOS settings
o WIN-OS/2 settings
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select OS/2 full screen so you can start an OS/2* program and run it so that it
covers the entire screen.  For example, you might want to run an OS/2
spreadsheet in a full screen instead of in a window.  When you run a program in
a full screen, you cannot see the windows and icons of the other programs that
are open.

Check the documentation for the program to see if the program requires a
specific session.

Some conditions require that a program use the full screen instead of a window.
You must use the full screen when the program:

o Must have access to the physical screen selector
o Must use the graphics mode of the display adapter
o Uses the OS/2 monitor facility
o Calls DosDevIOCtl directly
o Attempts to register replacements for the Vio, Kbd, or Mou subsystems of the
  operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select OS/2 window so you can start an OS/2* program and run it in a window.
When a program runs in a window, you can see the windows and icons of the other
programs that are open.

Check the documentation for the program to see if the program requires a
specific session.

Some conditions require that a program use the full screen instead of a window.
You must use the full screen when the program:

o Must have access to the physical screen selector
o Must use the graphics mode of the display adapter
o Uses the OS/2 monitor facility
o Calls DosDevIOCtl directly
o Attempts to register replacements for the Vio, Kbd, or Mou subsystems of the
  operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Close Window on Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box if you want the window to close automatically when the
program ends in the window.  A check mark in the check box indicates the choice
is selected.

Note:   You might not want to select this choice if the program you are going
        to run displays information on the screen when the program ends.  The
        window closes immediately and you might not have time to view the
        displayed information before it is removed.

This choice is not available for WIN-OS/2 sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS full screen so you can start a DOS program and run it so that it
covers the entire screen.  For example, you might want to run a DOS spreadsheet
in a full screen instead of in a window.  When you run a program in a full
screen, you cannot see the windows and icons of the other programs that are
open.

If a DOS program does not run the same in the OS/2* operating system as it does
in DOS, you can select the DOS settings push button and change the settings for
the program or the session in which you run it.  For more information about
settings, select Migrating programs or Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in
the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Migrate applications
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS window so you can start a DOS program and run it in a window.  When
a program runs in a window, you can see the windows and icons of the other
programs that are open.

If a DOS program does not run the same in the OS/2* operating system as it does
in DOS, you can select the DOS settings push button and change the settings for
the program or the session in which you run it.  For more information about
settings, select Migrating programs or Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in
the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Migrate applications
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select WIN-OS/2 full screen so you can start a WIN-OS/2* full-screen session.
When WIN-OS/2 runs full screen, you cannot see the windows and icons of the
other programs that are open.

You can automatically start more than one Windows** program in a WIN-OS/2
full-screen session.  For more information about running multiple Windows
programs, select Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session or
Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions in the list below.

Related Information:

o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS settings if you want to change the value of one or more settings.  A
window is displayed so you can make changes.  For additional help, select the
Help push button after the window is displayed.

Some settings can be changed after a program is running, but other settings
must be changed before a program is started in an open session or even before a
session is started.  For more information about changing settings, select
Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select WIN-OS/2 settings if you want to change the value of one or more
settings.  A window is displayed so you can make changes.  For additional help,
select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Some settings can be changed after a program is running, but other settings
must be changed before a program is started in an open session or even before a
session is started.  For more information about changing settings, select
Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select a setting.
 2. Change the value of the selected setting.  Depending upon the appearance of
    the Value field:

   o Select a different radio button.
   o Type into a single- or multiple-line entry field.
   o Drag the box or select a button to increase or decrease the numeric value
     in an entry field; or type a new value in the entry field.

 3. Select Save.

For a detailed explanation of each setting, select DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings,
descriptions from the "Related Information" list below.  (You can scroll this
help window to see the list.) For a detailed explanation of each field, select
from the list below:

o Setting
o Value
o Description
o Save
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:   Make sure that the value is correct for the WIN_RUNMODE (Run mode)
        setting.

 1. Select a setting.
 2. Change the value of the selected setting.  Depending upon the appearance of
    the Value field:

   o Select a different radio button.
   o Type into a single- or multiple-line entry field.
   o Drag the box or select a button to increase or decrease the numeric value
     in an entry field; or type a new value in the entry field.

 3. Select Save.

For a detailed explanation of each setting, select DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings,
descriptions from the "Related Information" list below.  (You can scroll this
help window to see the list.) For a detailed explanation of each field, select
from the list below:

o Setting
o Value
o Description
o Save
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Setting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Setting field contains a list of settings that apply to DOS and Windows**
programs.  Each setting has a value that is predetermined by the operating
system.  You can change the values of any or all of the settings.

When you select one of the settings from the list, a brief description is
displayed in the Description field and the current value is displayed in the
Value field.

For specific information about a DOS setting, including its possible values,
select DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions from the "Related Information"
list below.  Then select a setting after the list is displayed.

Some settings can be changed after a program is running, but other settings
must be changed before a program is started in an open session or even before a
session is started.  For more information about changing settings, select
Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The appearance of the Value area depends on the DOS setting that is selected.
It can contain one of the following:

o Radio buttons with one choice preselected.  To change this type of field,
  select a different radio button.
o A list from which you can select one or more items.
o An entry field in which you can type one line or several lines.
o An entry field which you change by dragging the box or selecting a button.
  Or you can type a new value in the entry field.

If you change information in an entry field in the Value area, but you have not
selected Save, you can select Default to redisplay the information that was in
the entry field when you opened the notebook.  Similarly, if you select a
different radio button, but you have not selected Save, you can select Default
to change the selection back to the other radio button.

Select Save after you make your changes.

For specific information about a DOS setting, including its possible values,
select DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings: descriptions from the "Related Information"
list below.

Note:   When you change the value of a setting for a DOS window, DOS full
        screen, or WIN-OS/2 full screen, the changes affect only the programs
        you run in that window or full screen.  Also, the changes are not saved
        when you close the window or full screen, or when you turn off the
        computer (even if you use the shutdown procedure before you turn off
        the computer).

If you want to save your changes indefinitely (so they are preset every time
you start a specific session or program), select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2
settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Description field contains a brief definition of the setting that is
highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save to save the new settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Window to display a pop-up menu of the choices you can select to manage the
size or location of any window or to close it.

The pop-up menu might include choices you can select to:

o Change a maximized window to its previous size (Restore)
o Move a window (Move)
o Change the size of a window (Change or Maximize)
o Hide or minimize a window (Hide or Minimize)
o Close a window (Close)
o Switch to the Window List (Window list).

Not all choices are available for all windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Font Size to view or change the size of the characters in the active
window.

A window is displayed when you select this choice.  It contains a Font preview
box that displays some text in the previously selected font size.  It also
contains a Window preview box that shows you how much of the screen is filled
when that amount of text is displayed in the selected font size.  When you
select a different font size, the text in both boxes changes to show you how
the text would look and how much of the screen would be filled.

The Sizes (Rows x Cols) field shows the number of rows and columns in the
current window, and the maximum number of rows and columns that can fit in a
maximized window with the selected font.  For example, 29 x 80 means 29 rows by
80 columns.

Note:   Some countries require that the size and contrast of characters on a
        display screen meet Standard 9241 Part 3 of the International
        Organization for Standardization (ISO) and the German DIN 66234
        Standard.  Fonts specified in these standards produce characters that
        are easy to read.

If you select an OS/2 2.1 font that does not comply with these standards, a
message will be displayed in the window.

To comply with these standards, select a font that does not cause the message
to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Set Font Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select a font size from the list.
 2. Select Change to change the font size only in the active window.  Or select
    Save to change the font size in the active window and in any windows you
    open later that are the same type of session.

    For example, if this is a DOS window, select Change to change the font size
    only in this window.  Or select Save to change the font size in this window
    and in any DOS window you open later.  The same applies if this is an OS/2*
    window.

Note:   If other DOS or OS/2 windows are open when you change the font size,
        the font size is not changed in those windows.

Some countries require that the size and contrast of characters on a display
screen meet Standard 9241 Part 3 of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) and the German DIN 66234 Standard.  Fonts specified in
these standards produce characters that are easy to read.

If you select an OS/2 2.1 font that does not comply with these standards, a
message will be displayed in the window.

To comply with these standards, select a font that does not cause the message
to be displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Font size (pels)
o Window preview
o Sizes (Rows x Cols)
o Font preview
o Change
o Save


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Size (Pels) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a font size from the Font Size ( pels) list.

The text in the Font preview box changes to show you how the text would look in
the selected font size.  The Window preview box changes to show you how much of
the screen would be filled if you change to the selected font size.

The information in the Sizes (Rows x Cols) field changes to show the number of
rows and columns that would fit in the current window, as well as the number
that would fit if you displayed the same information in a maximized window.
For example, 29 x 80 means 29 rows by 80 columns.

Note:   If other DOS or OS/2* windows are open when you change the font size,
        the font size is not changed in those windows.

Some countries require that the size and contrast of characters on a display
screen meet Standard 9241 part 3 of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) and the German DIN 66234 Standard.  Fonts specified in
these standards produce characters that are easy to read.

If you select an OS/2 2.1 font that does not comply with these standards, a
message will be displayed in the window.

To comply with these standards, select a font that does not cause the message
to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window Preview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window preview box shows you how much of the screen is filled by the font
that is selected in the Font size (pels) field.  If you select another font
size, the window in the Window preview box changes to show you how much of the
screen would be filled by the new font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sizes (Rows x Cols) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Sizes (Rows x Cols) field shows you the number of rows and columns that can
fit in the current window and the number that can fit if you displayed the same
information in a maximized window.  For example, 29 x 80 means 29 rows by 80
columns.

If you select another font size, the information in the Sizes (Rows x Cols)
field changes to show you how many rows and columns can fit in a maximized
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Preview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font preview box shows you the current size of your text.  If you select
another font size, the text in the Font Preview box changes to show you what
size your text would be.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change to change the font size in only the active window.

Note:   If other DOS or OS/2* windows are open when you change the font size,
        the font size is not changed in those windows.

You also can affect the font size in windows you open later if they are the
same type of session.  For example, if this is a DOS window, you can affect the
font size of DOS windows you open later.  To do this, use Save instead of
Change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save to change the font size of the active window of all windows you
open subsequently that are the same type of session.  For example, if this is a
DOS window, you can change the font size in this DOS window and in every DOS
window you open later.

Note:   If other DOS or OS/2* windows are open when you change the font size,
        the font size is not changed in those windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Help to display general information about this session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Scroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Scroll to turn scrolling on and off.  When it is turned on, you can see
information that is not currently displayed in the window.  When you select
Scroll, you can use the arrow keys to view undisplayed information.  When
scrolling is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the choice.  (Scrolling
is off when you first display the pop-up menu.) To turn scrolling off, select
Scroll again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Mark to highlight a block of text or graphics in a file so you can copy it
from the active window to the OS/2* clipboard.

When you select Mark, the mouse pointer changes to a box pointer.  After
selecting Mark, move the box pointer to the beginning of the text or graphics
you want to mark.  Press and hold mouse button 1 and move the box pointer to
the end of the text or graphics you want to mark.  Release the mouse button.
All characters are then highlighted.

If you are using the keyboard, use the arrow keys to move the box pointer to
the beginning of the text or graphics you want to mark.  Press and hold the
Shift key and use the arrow keys to move the box pointer to the end of the text
or graphics you want to mark.  Release the Shift key.  All characters are then
highlighted.

To make a change, move the box pointer to an area of the screen that is not
marked, and press the mouse button.  The portion of text or graphics that was
marked is unmarked.  The box pointer remains so that you can mark different
text or graphics.

If you decide not to copy any text or graphics to the clipboard, select the
Mark choice again.  The check mark next to Mark is removed, the portion of text
or graphics is unmarked in the file, and the box pointer returns to the mouse
pointer.

After you mark the text or graphics, you can select Copy  to move a duplicate
of the marked text or graphics from the window to the OS/2 clipboard.  Then you
can paste the text or graphics to any DOS window, OS/2 window, or WIN-OS/2*
session, or program that has a menu bar with a choice that enables a paste
function.

For more information about clipboards or to learn how to view the contents of
the OS/2 clipboard, select Copying or moving information (clipboard) or Using
clipboard viewer from the "Related Information" list below.

You might need to change the setting of the WIN-OS/2 clipboard from public to
private. For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or
private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session or Making the clipboard and DDE public
or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions from the "Related Information" list below.

Note:   The OS/2 clipboard can hold only one block of information (text or
        graphics) at a time.  When you copy information to the clipboard,
        graphics information is there but may not appear in the clipboard
        viewer.  If you try to render the graphics information, the following
        message might be displayed.

                   Format not rendered
        The graphics is rendered and you do not need to respond to this
        message.  When you copy text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, the
        previous contents are replaced by the new information without asking
        you to confirm the replacement.  To avoid overwriting the information
        in the clipboard, immediately paste the data to the new location.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Using clipboard viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 Separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy to place a duplicate of marked text or graphics in the OS/2*
clipboard.  You first must mark the text by selecting Mark.

Note:   The OS/2 clipboard can hold only one block of information (test or
        graphics) at a time.  When you copy information to the clipboard,
        graphics information is there but might not be displayed in the
        clipboard viewer.  If you try to render the graphics information, the
        following message might be displayed.

                   Format not rendered
        The graphics is rendered and you do not need to respond to this
        message.  When you copy text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, the
        previous contents are replaced by the new information without asking
        you to confirm the replacement.  To avoid overwriting the information
        in the clipboard, immediately paste the data to the new location.

After you copy the marked text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, you can paste
a duplicate of the text or graphics in the same window, another DOS or OS/2
window, a WIN-OS/2 session, or any program that has a menu bar with a choice
that enables a paste function.

For more information about clipboards or to learn how to view the contents of
the OS/2 clipboard, select Copying or moving information (clipboard) or Using
clipboard viewer from the "Related Information" list below.

You might need to change the setting of the WIN-OS/2 clipboard from public to
private. For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or
private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session or Making the clipboard and DDE public
or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Using clipboard viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy All to place a duplicate of all the text or graphics in the active
window in the OS/2* clipboard.

Note:   The OS/2 clipboard can hold only one block of information (text or
        graphics) at a time.  When you copy information to the clipboard,
        graphics information is there but might not be displayed in the
        clipboard viewer.  If you try to render the graphics information, the
        following message might be displayed.

                   Format not rendered
        The graphics is rendered and you do not need to respond to this
        message.  When you copy text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, the
        previous contents are replaced by the new information without asking
        you to confirm the replacement.  To avoid overwriting the information
        in the clipboard, immediately paste the data to the new location.

After you copy the marked text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, you can paste
a duplicate of the text or graphics in the same window, another DOS window or
OS/2 window, a WIN-OS/2* session, or any program that has a menu bar with a
choice that enables a paste function.

For more information about clipboards or to find out how to view the contents
of the OS/2 clipboard, select Copying or moving information (clipboard) or
Using clipboard viewer from the "Related Information" list below.

You might need to change the setting of the WIN-OS/2 clipboard from public to
private. For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or
private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session or Making the clipboard and DDE public
or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Using clipboard viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Paste to place a duplicate of the text or graphics from the OS/2* clipboard
in one of the following:

o Any active DOS or OS/2 window.
o A WIN-OS/2* session
o A program that has a menu bar with a choice that enables a paste function.

Note:   The OS/2 clipboard can hold only one block of information (text or
        graphics) at a time.  When you copy information to the clipboard,
        graphics information is there but might not be displayed in the
        clipboard viewer.  If you try to render the graphics information, the
        following message might be displayed.

                   Format not rendered
        The graphics is rendered and you do not need to respond to this
        message.  When you copy text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard, the
        previous contents are replaced by the new information without asking
        you to confirm the replacement.  To avoid overwriting the information
        in the clipboard, immediately paste the data to the new location.

You can place text or graphics in the OS/2 clipboard by using either:

o The menu bar of a program that has a cut or copy function for example, the
  OS/2 System Editor.
o The Copy or Copy all choice in a DOS window or OS/2 window when it does not
  contain a program that has a menu bar with a cut or copy function.

For more information about clipboards or to find out how to view the contents
of the OS/2 clipboard, select Copying or moving information (clipboard) or
Using clipboard viewer from the "Related Information" list below.

You might need to change the setting of the WIN-OS/2 clipboard from public to
private.  For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or
private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session or Making the clipboard and DDE public
or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Using clipboard viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Full-Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Full-screen when you want the program that is in the active window to be
displayed full screen (to cover the entire screen).  You cannot see any windows
or icons.

The DOS window remains open, and you can redisplay the program in the window by
selecting Windowed from the pop-up menu.

You also can switch between window and full screen by pressing Alt+Home.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Windowed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Windowed when you want the program that is active to be displayed in a
window.  The DOS full screen remains open, and you can redisplay the program in
the full screen by selecting Full-screen from the pop-up menu.

You also can switch between window and full screen by pressing Alt+Home.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS settings if you want to change the value of one or more settings.  A
window is displayed so you can make changes.  For additional help, select the
Help push button after the window is displayed.

Some settings can be changed after a program is running, but other settings
must be changed before a program is started in an open session or even before a
session is started.  For more information about changing settings, select
Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Example of Creating a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Data-File Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This data-file object is linked (associated) to the program object for the OS/2
System Editor by default.  This means that anytime you select this data-file
object, it will be displayed in the System Editor.

You can link this data-file object to other program objects, such as another
editor or a spreadsheet.  For more information about association, select
Associating program and data-file objects from the "Related Information" list
below.

Use the choices on the pop-up menu to work with this data-file object.  For
example, you can select Open and then select Settings to change the name of the
object or change its icon.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Program Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this program object to start the program represented by the object.  You
can associate this program object to one or more of your data-file objects.
Then whenever you select a data-file object to which this program object is
associated, this program is started and the data-file object is displayed.  For
example, you can associate your spreadsheet data-file objects to the program
object for your spreadsheet.  For more information about association, select
Associating program and data-file objects from the "Related Information" list
below.

Use the choices on the pop-up menu to work with this program object.  For
example, you can select Open, Settings, and General to change the name of the
object or change its icon.  Or you can select Settings and then Association to
associate this program object to one or more data-file objects.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Migrate Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Migrate Applications to create program objects for the DOS, Windows**, and
OS/2* programs installed on a hard disk.  Each program object is placed in a
folder on the desktop.  Migrate Applications also changes the settings for
certain DOS and Windows programs to improve their performance in OS/2* 2.1.

Run Migrate Applications if:

o You installed a new DOS or Windows program on a hard disk.
o You ran Migrate Applications which changed the settings of a DOS or Windows
  program, then you changed those settings, and now you want to change the
  settings back.
o You did not run Migrate Applications at the end of the OS/2 2.1 installation,
  but you had DOS and Windows programs on your hard disk before you installed
  the current version of the operating system and during installation you did
  not reformat your computer.

The program objects are placed in folders according to whether or not they
matched entries in the migration database.  For more information about
migration,select Migrating programs or Finding old programs in the list below.

Related Information:

o Finding your programs
o Migrate applications


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Specify Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type any parameter that the program needs when it starts or that you want the
program to use when it starts.

Not all programs need parameters when they start.  The documentation for the
program should tell you if the program needs any parameters and how to use
them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select WIN-OS/2 window so you can start a Windows** program and run it in a
window.  When a program runs in a window, you can see the windows and icons of
the other programs that are open.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Help to display general information about this session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Window Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start a program from the command prompt in a DOS window session.  When
you run a program in a window session, you can see the windows and icons of
other programs on your desktop.

DOS window sessions have specific functions available that you can select from
a menu.  To see them, select the title-bar icon in an open DOS window or
display (from the DOS Window object) the pop-up menu for an open DOS window
session.  Not all choices are available for every DOS window session, nor are
all choices ever displayed in the pop-up menu, but help is available for each
choice that is listed in either menu.  Use the choices to:

o Switch from a window session to a full-screen session (Full-screen)
o Change the size of the characters that are displayed in the active window
  (Size)
o Turn scrolling on or off (Scroll)
o Mark text or graphics in an open DOS window for copying to the OS/2*
  clipboard (Mark)
o Copy marked text or graphics from the open window to the OS/2 clipboard
  (Copy)
o Copy all text or graphics from the active window to the OS/2 clipboard (Copy
  All)
o Copy all text or graphics from the OS/2 clipboard to the active window
  (Paste)
o Change the settings for programs that run in the active DOS window (DOS
  Settings).

Note:   In a DOS window session, the available clipboard functions are
        displayed in the pop-up menu only after the session is open.

When a program runs in a DOS window session, the text in the title bar changes
from DOS Window to the program name.  When the program ends, Completed: is
displayed before the program name.

While a program is running in a DOS window session, the Window List contains
the name of the program.  When a program ends automatically or when you close
the program, the name of the program is replaced by DOS Window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Full-Screen Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start a DOS program from the command prompt in a DOS full-screen
session.  When you run a program in a full-screen session, the program covers
the entire screen; you cannot see the windows and icons of other programs on
your desktop.

The pop-up menu for an active DOS full-screen session contains choices that are
specific to that type of session.  To view these choices, press Alt+Esc from
the open full-screen session and display the pop-up menu for the DOS Full
Screen object from its icon.  Use the choices to:

o Switch from a full-screen session to a window session(Windowed)
o Copy all text or graphics from the active full-screen session to the OS/2*
  clipboard (Copy All)
o Copy all text or graphics from the OS/2 clipboard to the active full-screen
  session (Paste)
o Change the settings for programs that run in the DOS full-screen session (DOS
  Settings).

Note:   In a DOS full-screen session, the available clipboard functions are
        displayed in the pop-up menu only after the session is open.

While a program is running in a DOS full-screen session, the Window List
contains the name of the program.  When a program ends automatically or when
you close the program, the name of the program is replaced by DOS Full Screen.

The pop-up menu for a DOS full-screen session can be displayed only from the
DOS Full Screen object.  To switch from the full-screen session to the object,
press Alt+Esc repeatedly until the DOS Full Screen object is displayed.  Then
press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Window Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start an OS/2* program from the command prompt in an OS/2 window
session.  When you run a program in a window session, you can see the windows
and icons of other programs on your desktop.

OS/2 window sessions have specific functions available that you can select from
a menu.  To see them, select the title-bar icon in an open OS/2 window or
display (from the OS/2 Window object) the pop-up menu for an open OS/2 window
session.  Not all choices are available for every OS/2 window session, nor are
all choices ever displayed in the pop-up menu, but help is available for each
choice that is listed in either menu.  Use the choices to:

o Change the size of the characters that are displayed in the active window
  (Size)
o Turn scrolling on or off (Scroll)
o Mark text or graphics in an open OS/2 window for copying to the OS/2
  clipboard (Mark)
o Copy marked text or graphics from the open window to the OS/2 clipboard
  (Copy)
o Copy all text or graphics from the active window to the OS/2 clipboard (Copy
  All)
o Copy all text or graphics from the OS/2 clipboard to the active window
  (Paste).

Note:   In an OS/2 window session, the available clipboard functions are
        displayed in the pop-up menu only after the session is open.

When a program runs in an OS/2 window session, the text in the title bar
changes from OS/2 Window to the program name.  When the program ends,
Completed: is displayed before the program name.

While a program is running in an OS/2 window session, the Window List contains
the name of the program.  When a program ends automatically or when you close
the program, the name of the program is replaced by OS/2 Window.

Some conditions require that an OS/2 program run in an OS/2 full-screen session
instead of an OS/2 window session.  You must use an OS/2 full-screen session
when the program:

o Must have access to the physical screen selector
o Must use the graphics mode of the display adapter
o Uses the OS/2 monitor facility
o Calls DosDevIOCtl directly
o Attempts to register replacements for the Vio, Kbd, or Mou subsystems of the
  operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System objects, such as folders, palettes, and drives have a hide button, which
you can change to a minimize button.  Then you can select a radio button in
Minimize Button Behavior so you can minimize the window to either the desktop
or the Minimized Window Viewer.

You also can change what happens when you select an object that is open.  By
default, the window for the object is redisplayed with its current view (the
way the window was when you removed it from the screen).  You can change the
default so that you open a new window and display the current view each time
you select the icon for the object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Button appearance for windows
o Minimize button behavior
o Object open behavior
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the system default for what happens when you select the minimize
button on the title bar of a program object or program-file object.  By
default, an icon is placed in the Minimized Window Viewer.  Instead, you can
have the icon placed on the desktop, or have the window hidden.

You also can change the system default for what happens when you select an
object that is open.  By default, the window for the object is redisplayed with
its current view (the way the window was when you removed it from the screen).
Instead, you can change the default so that you open a new window and display
the current view each time you select the icon for the object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Minimize button behavior
o Object open behavior
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Button Appearance for Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The radio buttons in Button appearance for windows indicate whether a system
object, such as a folder, palette, or drive, has a hide button or a minimize
button on the title bar of its windows.

By default, Hide button is selected for all system objects.  When you hide a
window, it becomes invisible on the desktop, and its name is added to the
Window List.

You can change the default by selecting Minimize button.  Then you can select a
radio button in Minimize Button Behavior so you can minimize the window to
either the desktop or the Minimized Window Viewer.

Note:   If you change the button selection while an object is open, you will
        not see the new button on the title bar of the open window when you
        close the Settings notebook.  You must close the object and reopen it
        to see the new button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Minimize Button Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All program objects and program-file objects have a minimize button on the
title bar of their windows by default.  You also can display a minimize button
for system objects, such as folders, palettes, and drives.

Use the radio buttons in Minimize button behavior to change what happens when
you select the minimize button.

Select Hide window to make the window invisible on the desktop.  Its name is
added to the Window List.

Minimize window to viewer is the system default.  When this radio button is
selected and you select the Minimize icon, the window is removed from the
screen and an icon is placed in the Minimized Window Viewer.

Select Minimize window to desktop to remove the window from the screen and
place an icon on the desktop.

Note:   A change does not occur immediately if the object is an open
        full-screen session.  You must close a full-screen session and reopen
        it for the change to affect that session.

If a program does not run correctly in the Minimized Window Viewer, select
Minimize window to desktop.  For example, if a clock does not update the time
in the Minimized Window Viewer, select Minimize window to desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Open Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When this object is open, and you select its icon or bring its open window to
the foreground, the window is redisplayed the way it looked before it was
minimized, hidden or covered up (its current view).

You can select Create new window to change what happens when you select this
open object.  Instead of redisplaying the current view of the window, you
create a new window that also contains the current view.  You then have two
windows with the same view.  You can use each window independently of the other
without opening multiple objects.  For example, you can create a new window for
a DOS window session and then run different programs in the two windows.

When you create new windows in this way, the new windows are available only
temporarily.  When you close the windows or shut down the operating system, the
system saves only the last view you saved before you created the multiple
windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Separate Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Separate session to run a Windows** program alone in a WIN-OS/2 window
session.

This check box is selected during migration if a Windows program needs to run
with special settings to improve the performance of the program.

During migration, other Windows programs are set to run in a shared WIN-OS/2
window.  Select this check box if you want to change that default and have the
program run in a separate session of WIN-OS/2 window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Start Minimized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box if you want the program to be displayed as an icon
(instead of an open window) when it is started.

A check mark in the check box indicates this choice is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start a program from the command prompt in an OS/2* full-screen
session.  When you run a program in a full-screen session, the program covers
the entire screen; you cannot see the windows and icons of other programs on
your desktop.

While a program is running in an OS/2 full-screen session, the Window List
contains the name of the program.  When a program ends automatically or when
you close the program, the name of the program is replaced by OS/2 Full Screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Version 3.1 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the session type that you want to make public or private for all
Windows** programs in a WIN-OS/2 Version 3.1 session: WIN-OS/2 Full Screen,
WIN-OS/2 Window, or Separate Session.

Select WIN-OS/2 settings to change WIN-OS/2 settings for all Windows programs
and session types.  For more information about settings, select WIN_DDE or
WIN_CLIPBOARD from the "Related Information." list below.

Note:   If you change a setting, the change affects only subsequent Windows
        programs that are started.  Windows programs that are currently running
        are not affected.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o Separate session
o WIN-OS/2 settings
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o WIN_DDE
o WIN_CLIPBOARD
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Data Exchange ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the radio button for public or private clipboard and dynamic data
exchange (DDE) between OS/2*, DOS, and WIN-OS/2* sessions  Your selection
affects all OS/2, DOS, and WIN-OS/2* sessions.

By default, both the DDE and the clipboard are public.  For more information
about sharing data, select Copying or moving information (Clipboard) or
Exchanging data from the "Related Information." list.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (Clipboard)
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Exchanging data


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use WIN-OS/2 Setup to select a public or private clipboard or dynamic data
exchange (DDE) between OS/2*, DOS, and WIN-OS/2* sessions.  You also can use
WIN-OS/2 Setup to change the WIN-OS/2 settings and session types for all
WIN-OS/2 sessions.  To specify a particular session type, select the 3.1
Session tab from the WIN-OS/2 Setup Settings notebook.

Related Information:

o WIN_DDE
o WIN_CLIPBOARD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select a setting.
 2. Change the value of the selected setting.  Depending upon the appearance of
    the Value field:

   o Select a different radio button.
   o Type into a single- or multiple-line entry field.
   o Drag the box or select a button to increase or decrease the numeric value
     in an entry field; or type a new value in the entry field.

 3. Select Save.

For a detailed explanation of each setting, select DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings,
descriptions from the "Related Information" list below.  (You can scroll this
help window to see the list.) For a detailed explanation of each field, select
from the list below:

o Setting
o Value
o Description
o Save
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for PIF file.PIF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use PIF file.PIF to create a new picture interchange format (PIF) object.  Then
you can change the name of the new object, using the pop-up menu.  By default,
the PIF file.PIF object is linked (associated) to the Picture Viewer program
object.  Therefore, whenever you select the PIF file.PIF object, the Picture
Viewer is started.

You can associate the PIF file.PIF object to a different program viewer or
editor.  For more information about association, select Associating program and
data-file objects from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Metafile.MET ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Metafile.MET to create a new metafile object.  Then you can change the name
of the new object, using the pop-up menu.  By default, the Metafile.MET object
is linked (associated) to the Picture Viewer program object.  Therefore,
whenever you select the Metafile.MET object, the Picture Viewer is started.

You can associate the Metafile.MET object to a different program viewer or
editor.  For more information about association, select Associating program and
data-file objects from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for WIN-OS/2 Groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains folders that represent the migrated groups
from the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager.  These folders contain program objects.

Use the folders in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder to select program objects to
start your Windows programs** in a WIN-OS/2 session.  For more information
about starting Windows programs, select Starting a WIN-OS/2 session from the
list below.

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Default to change the selected state of Close window on exit to the way
it was when the operating system was installed.

Warning:  The default session is OS/2 window.  Therefore, do not select Default
unless you are making changes for an object that runs in an OS/2 window.  For
objects that run in other sessions, such as a DOS full-screen session, use the
check boxes to change the settings.

If you accidentally select Default for an object that cannot run in an OS/2
window, select Undo to restore the previous setting for the session type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings:  Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Depending upon the type of setting you want to change, select the appropriate
group item from the following list.  A window appears in which you select a
specific setting from the group.

o DOS keyboard settings
o DOS memory settings
o DOS mouse and touch screen settings
o DOS printer settings
o DOS video settings
o Other DOS settings
o WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS Keyboard Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its range of values, and explains how
you can change the value field:

o KBD_ALTHOME_BYPASS (Alt+Home bypass)
o KDB_BUFFER_EXTEND (Buffer extension)
o KBD_CTRL_BYPASS (Control key bypass)
o KBD_RATE_LOCK (Repeat rate lock)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS Memory Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its permissible range of values, and
explains how you can change the value field:

o DOS_HIGH
o DOS_RMSIZE (DOS memory size)
o DOS_UMB (DOS owns UMBs)
o DPMI_DOS_API (DOS API translation)
o DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT
o DPMI_NETWORK_BUFF_SIZE
o EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION
o EMS_LOW_OS_MAP_REGION
o EMS_MEMORY_LIMIT
o EMS_FRAME_LOCATION
o MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS
o MEM_INCLUDE_REGIONS
o XMS_HANDLES
o XMS_MEMORY_LIMIT
o XMS_MINIMUM_HMA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS Mouse and Touch Screen Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its permissible range of values, and
explains how you can change the value field:

o MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS
o TOUCH_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS Video Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its range of values, and explains how
you can change the value field:

o VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP
o VIDEO_FASTPASTE
o VIDEO_MODE_RESTRICTION
o VIDEO_ONDEMAND_MEMORY (On-demand memory allocation)
o VIDEO_RETRACE_EMULATION
o VIDEO_ROM_EMULATION
o VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION (Screen-switch notification)
o VIDEO_WINDOW_REFRESH (Window refresh interval)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Other DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its range of values, and explains how
you can change the value field:

o AUDIO_ADAPTER_SHARING
o COM_DIRECT_ACCESS
o COM_HOLD
o COM_RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH
o COM_SELECT
o DOS_AUTOEXEC
o DOS_BACKGROUND_EXECUTION
o DOS_BREAK
o DOS_DEVICE
o DOS_FCBS
o DOS_FCBS_KEEP
o DOS_FILES
o DOS_LAST_DRIVE
o DOS_SHELL
o DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE
o DOS_VERSION
o HW_NOSOUND
o HW_ROM_TO_RAM
o HW_TIMER
o IDLE_SECONDS
o IDLE_SENSITIVITY
o INT_DURING_IO


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its range of values, and explains how
you can change the value field:

o WIN_CLIPBOARD
o WIN_DDE
o WIN_RUN_MODE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KBD_ALTHOME_BYPASS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select KBD_ALTHOME_BYPASS (Alt+Home bypass); then select the On radio button if
you want to reserve this key combination for your DOS session.

Normally, if you press Alt+Home, you switch your sessions between a window and
full-screen.  By selecting On, you enable the program in your session to use
this key combination for a different purpose.  For example, select On to
reserve Alt+Home for a Windows** program in a WIN-OS/2* session.

The default value for this setting is Off, which enables you to use Alt+Home
for switching between a window and full-screen.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o KBD_CTRL_BYPASS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KBD_BUFFER_EXTEND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select KBD_BUFFER_EXTEND (Buffer extension); then select the Off radio button
if you want to prevent an increase in the keyboard type-ahead buffer size from
16 to 128 bytes.

The type-ahead buffer holds characters input from the keyboard until a program
can process them.

When you select On for this setting, each DOS session devotes additional memory
if expanding the keyboard buffer.  Programs that bypass the input buffer might
not benefit from this feature.

The default value for this setting is On, because most programs benefit from
the ability to increase the size of the type-ahead buffer.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KBD_CTRL_BYPASS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use KBD_CTRL_BYPASS (Control key bypass) if you want to use either Alt+Esc or
Ctrl+Esc in your DOS session.  The field for this setting contains a list from
which you can select one of these key combinations.  You can select only one
choice in the list.

Normally, if you press Alt+Esc, you switch between sessions; if you press
Ctrl+Esc, you display the Window List, from which you can select the active
window.  By selecting either ALT_ESC (Alt+Esc) or CTRL_ESC (Ctrl+Esc) for
KBD_CTRL_BYPASS, you enable the program in your DOS session to interpret the
control-key combination you select.  For example, you might run a
terminate-stay-resident (TSR) program with a second program in one DOS session
and select Alt+Esc as a means of activating or deactivating the TSR within the
session.

The default value for this setting is NONE, which enables Alt+Esc and Ctrl+Esc
to have the default functions described in the previous paragraph.  The default
value for this setting in a WIN-OS/2* full-screen session is CTRL_ESC
(Ctrl+Esc), which enables the WIN-OS/2 Task List to display instead of the
OS/2* 2.1 Window List.

Note:   The WIN-OS/2 Setup object determines the default for the
        KBD_CTRL_BYPASS setting for any new WIN-OS/2 session.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o KBD_ALTHOME_BYPASS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> KBD_RATE_LOCK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select KBD_RATE_LOCK (Repeat rate lock), then select the On radio button if you
want to prevent a program from increasing the keyboard repeat rate.

The keyboard repeat rate is the rate at which a character repeats when the you
press and hold a keyboard key.  Select On if the program in this DOS session
might adversely affect other programs by changing the keyboard rate.

The default value for this setting is Off, because most DOS programs do not
modify the repeat rate, and most of those that do give the results that are
expected.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_RMSIZE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_RMSIZE (DOS memory size) if you want to change the amount of memory
available to DOS programs running in this session.  The field for this setting
shows the amount of memory, in kilobytes (KB), that a DOS program has for its
use.  Values range from 128 to 640.  If you want to decrease the amount of
memory available to DOS programs running in this session, drag the box, select
a button, or type into the entry field.

Decrease the amount of program memory if your video adapter requires some of
the 640KB normally allocated to programs, or if your program cannot run
properly in an area of memory only as large as 640KB.

The maximum value, 640, is the default.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_UMB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS_UMB (DOS owns UMBs); then select the Off radio button when required
to give ownership of upper memory blocks (UMBs) to certain types of
terminate-stay-resident (TSR) programs and DOS device drivers.

Memory addresses 640KB to 1MB can be divided into UMBs of 16KB or more.  When
TSR programs and device drivers reside in UMBs, your other DOS programs can use
all of memory address area 0 to 640KB.  The DOS kernel normally owns UMBs and
manages the loading of TSR programs and device drivers into a UMB using the
DEVICEHIGH= and LOADHIGH= statements in your DOS CONFIG.SYS file.  Some
programs capable of loading into a UMB must own and manage the UMB.  Change
this setting to Off for a DOS session if you want to run a program that must
own a UMB in that session.

The default value for this setting is On.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT to define the amount of DPMI (DOS Protected Memory
Interface) available to the DOS session.  The field for this setting contains
values expressed in 1 megabyte (MB) intervals, ranging from 0 to 512MB.  To
change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the entry field.
This setting enables you to specify the amount of DPMI memory needed for your
DOS programs, on a per-session basis.

Select 0 if your DOS program does not use DPMI.

The default value is 4 (MB).  Increasing this setting for a WIN-OS/2* session
enables more programs to run in this session.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS Protected Mode Interface


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EMS_FRAME_LOCATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use EMS_FRAME_LOCATION to change the location of the Lotus**/ Intel**/
Microsoft** Expanded Memory Specification (LIM EMS) expanded-memory region.
Select the arrow to the right of the list to see all the choices.

Use this setting if your DOS session addresses a device that requires an area
of memory within an automatically determined expanded-memory region.  If you
have a problem running a program that takes advantage of LIM EMS, change the
EMS_HIGH_MAP_OS_REGION DOS setting to 0, then run your program.  If the problem
continues, change this EMS_FRAME_LOCATION value.

Select NONE if you want to turn off the high EMS range.  The default is AUTO,
which enables the session to locate expanded memory automatically.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION
o Expanded memory specification
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION to select an amount of memory that a DOS program can
add to the 64KB expanded-memory region accessed by Lotus**/ Intel**/
Microsoft**  Expanded Memory Specification (LIM EMS).  The field for this
setting contains values in kilobytes units, ranging from 0 to 96.

To change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the entry
field.

If you select values for the MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS and MEM_INCLUDE_REGIONS
settings to avoid a conflict with addresses used by devices, you can set this
EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION to an area that accommodates both your program and the
device.

To resolve an expanded-memory address conflict with a device, set
EMS_HIGH_OS_MAP_REGION to 0.

The default value is 32.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Expanded memory specification
o Memory extenders
o EMS_LOW_OS_MAP_REGION
o MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS
o MEM_INCLUDE_REGIONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EMS_LOW_OS_MAP_REGION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use EMS_LOW_OS_MAP_REGION to select an amount of re-mappable conventional
memory.  This setting affects only DOS programs capable of remapping
conventional memory.  The field for this setting contains values in kilobytes
(KB) units, ranging from 0 to 576.  To change the value, drag the box, select a
button, or type into the entry field.

The default value is 384.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Expanded memory specification
o Memory extenders
o EMS_MEMORY_LIMIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EMS_MEMORY_LIMIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use EMS_MEMORY_LIMIT to define the amount of EMS (Expanded Memory
Specification) available to the DOS session.  The field for this setting
contains values expressed in 16-kilobyte (KB) units, ranging from 0 to 32768.
To change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the entry
field.

Select 0 if your program cannot use EMS.  Select a value higher than the
default for a program that requires a large amount of expanded memory.  This
setting enables you to limit the amount of EMS that a program reserves, which
prevents a program from allocating more memory than necessary.  The system does
not reserve any EMS for a program until that program requests EMS.

The default value is 2048.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Expanded memory specification
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_HIGH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS_HIGH (Load DOS high); then select the Off radio button if your
program requires that DOS is located below the 640KB address of DOS session
memory.  Selecting Off is similar to the statement to DOS=LOW.

The default value for this setting is On, making all of the memory area from
address 0 to address 640KB available to user programs.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> XMS_HANDLES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use XMS_HANDLES to change the number of XMS (eXtended Memory Specification)
handles set aside for use by the DOS session.  The field for this setting
contains values ranging from 0 to 128 (handles).  To change the value, drag the
box, select a button, or type into the entry field.

Each XMS block has a handle (a unique number) associated with it, and the XMS
facility allocates memory space to hold the quantity of handle numbers you
specify.  Use this setting to limit the reserved spaces.  You can increase the
value in this field if you expect your program to require a large number of
handles.  Setting aside space for a large number of handles may slow your
system.

The default value is 32.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o eXtended memory specification
o Memory extenders
o XMS_MEMORY_LIMIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> XMS_MEMORY_LIMIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use XMS_MEMORY_LIMIT to specify the amount of memory any one DOS session can
allocate to XMS (eXtended Memory Specification).  The field for this setting
contains values in kilobyte (KB) units, ranging from 0 to 16384.  The value
16384KB is equivalent to 16 megabytes (MB).  To change the value, drag the box,
select a button, or type into the entry field.

Specifying a large number for either the global or the per-session
extended-memory limit can slow your system.

The default value is 2048.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o eXtended memory specification
o Memory extenders
o XMS_MINIMUM_HMA


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> XMS_MINIMUM_HMA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use XMS_MINIMUM_HMA to change the minimum of high memory area (HMA) available
for use as conventional memory.  The field for this setting contains values in
kilobyte (KB) units, ranging from 0 to 63.  To change the value, drag the box,
select a button, or type into the entry field.

Only one program per session can use HMA.  You can use this setting to adjust
the size of the minimum memory allocated to HMA.  This prevents a small program
from allocating HMA and wasting any area between the program size and the HMA
maximum of slightly less than 64KB.

Only a real-mode program can use HMA as conventional memory.  If your program
can run in the protected mode specified by DPMI (DOS Protected Mode Interface),
you do not need this setting.

The default value is 0, or no minimum, which causes the system to assign the
entire HMA area to the first program requesting HMA.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o eXtended memory specification
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS  EMS (Expanded Memory Specification), XMS (eXtended
Memory Specification), or a copy of a ROM (read-only memory) program cannot use
the areas you exclude.  Type addresses as hexadecimal numbers.  You can specify
a range of memory, or you can supply a single address for the beginning address
for a 4KB region. If you want to exclude several regions, separate them with
commas.  For example:

C0000,D0000-D8000

By default, this field is empty.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MEM_INCLUDE_REGIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use MEM_INCLUDE_REGIONS to fill in any areas between memory addresses 640KB and
1MB that you want to designate for EMS (Expanded Memory Specification), XMS
(eXtended Memory Specification), or a copy of a ROM (read-only memory) program.
Type addresses as hexadecimal numbers.  You can specify a range of memory, or
you can supply a single address for the beginning address for a 4KB region. If
you want to include several regions, separate them with commas.  For example:

C0000,D0000-D7FFF

Note:   The include region D0000-D8000 will include the entire memory area
        between D8000 and D8FFF.

Assign addresses to the include region when you know your DOS session does not
use device drivers or hardware adapters that use memory between 640KB and 1MB.
Including regions can improve the performance of programs that use EMS or XMS
memory.

By default, this field is empty.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Memory extenders


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS; then select the On radio button if you use a
program that manages its own mouse positions, setting mouse sensitivity and
mouse tracking speed separately from Presentation Manager* mouse settings.  For
example, use MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS and select On if your screen displays two
unsynchronized mouse pointers, one in the DOS session, and one in a
Presentation Manager session or on the Desktop.

After you select On, you must press a mouse button inside the DOS session to
delete the Presentation Manager pointer.  Press Alt, Ctrl+Esc, or Shift+Esc to
display the Presentation Manager pointer again.

The default value is Off.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o TOUCH_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_BREAK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_BREAK (Break); then select the On radio button if you want the
operating system to check for the keystrokes Ctrl+Break or Ctrl+C while a
program is processing.  Then, you can press Ctrl+Break or press Ctrl+C to stop
a process.  For example, if you have Break set to On, and you want to stop
compiling a program, press Ctrl+Break.

Unless you specify otherwise during installation, the operating system places a
BREAK=OFF statement in your CONFIG.SYS file.  With BREAK=OFF in CONFIG.SYS, the
operating system checks for the Ctrl+ keys only during standard input or output
operations; it does not check for Ctrl+ keys while the program processes
information.  For example, if CONFIG.SYS has BREAK=OFF, the operating system
checks for the Ctrl+ keys when the program expects input from the keyboard or
the program sends information to the screen or printer.  You cannot use
Ctrl+Break or Ctrl+C to stop a process (such as a program compilation) if an
error occurs or the process repeatedly loops through the same steps.

Programs run more slowly when you set Break On. The default for this setting is
Off.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HW_ROM_TO_RAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select HW_ROM_TO_RAM (Copy ROMs to RAM); then select the On radio button if you
want to copy the Basic Input Output System (BIOS) from read-only memory (ROM)
to random access memory (RAM).  BIOS might run faster in ROM than in RAM. Also,
to test and debug a program, you can set break points in the RAM copy.

The default value is Off.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_DEVICE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_DEVICE to modify the set of DOS device drivers that is loaded into a
particular DOS session.

When you select this setting, you see a list with the information about each
DOS device driver specified in your CONFIG.SYS file.  The information consists
of the path and file name and the current value (if available) of each DOS
device driver.  For example:

c:\os2\mdos\connect.sys /a= 10&/b= 12

You can:

o Add a DOS device driver by typing its name on a new line.
o Remove a DOS device driver by deleting all information about it.
o Add or change a value by typing the new value.
o Delete a value.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_SHELL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_SHELL if you want to specify a path and file name where the DOS command
processor program is located.  When typing a new path and file name, check that
no characters remain from a previous value in this field.

The default path and file name are:

c:\os2\mdos\command.com c:\os2\mdos /p

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE if you want to load a specific DOS version into a DOS
session; then specify a diskette or a location on your disk that contains the
specific DOS version in loadable form.

Normally, the OS/2* operating system emulates DOS when you start a DOS session.
By providing a DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE in this setting and following certain other
set up requirements, you instruct the operating system to substitute your
version of DOS when you start a DOS window or DOS full-screen session.

A specific version of DOS might enable you to use a program that emulated DOS
does not run properly.  For example, you cannot use emulated DOS to run IBM DOS
LAN Requestor.  As another example, some programs use a device (such as an IBM
3353 Optical Disk Drive) whose driver does not load into an emulated DOS
session.

Note:   A specific version of DOS that is separate from OS/2 can take more
        memory than emulated DOS.  This setting supports only DOS versions 3.0
        through 5.0.

There are three methods to start a specific DOS version.  Each method requires
setup steps.  To find out how to set up a session that starts a specific DOS
version from a diskette, select Starting DOS from a diskette from "Related
Information."  To find out how to set up a session that starts a specific DOS
version from a file on your hard disk that acts like a diskette, select
Starting DOS from an image file.  To find out how to set up a DOS partition,
select Starting DOS from a partition.

Related Information:

o Starting DOS from a diskette
o Starting DOS from an image file
o Starting a specific DOS version
o Starting DOS from a partition
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_FCBS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_FCBS (FCB count) if you load a file-sharing module and want to change
the maximum quantity of file control blocks (FCBs) that a DOS session can have
open.  The field for this setting contains a range of values from 0 to 255
(FCBs).  To change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the
entry field.

If you notice poor DOS session performance in a networking environment, use
this setting to limit the number of FCBs.  If you set a value for this field
and your DOS session opens the maximum FCBs you specify, DOS closes the least
recently used FCB when it receives the next FCB open request.  You can use an
additional DOS setting, DOS_FCBS_KEEP, to prevent DOS from closing one or more
of the first FCBs it opens.

The default value is 16.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS_FCBS_KEEP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_FCBS_KEEP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_FCBS_KEEP if you want to specify the number of file control blocks
(FCBs) that DOS does not automatically close.  DOS closes FCBs to keep the
number of open FCBs at, or below, the maximum allowed.  The field for this
setting contains a range of values from 0 to 255 (FCBs).  To change the value,
drag the box, select a button, or type into the entry field.

The default value is 16.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS_FCBS (FCB count)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COM_HOLD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select COM_HOLD (Hold COM resource); then select the On radio button if you
want to give exclusive use of a particular communications port (for example,
COM1) to your DOS session.  Selecting On prevents other sessions from using the
same COM port until you end the DOS session.  It also enables the DOS session
using the COM port to access data files on your disk or diskette.

When this setting is Off, the operating system releases the COM port as soon as
the program using it ends, even if the DOS session from which you access the
port is still active.  Some DOS communications functions, such as accessing a
computerized bulletin board, require two programs -one that dials the bulletin
board, and one that enables you to exchange information with the bulletin board
computer.  Select On if your system sometimes disconnects a dialed connection
from a DOS session.  For example, select On if you have difficulty maintaining
communication between a DOS program and a bulletin board.

The default value is Off.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IDLE_SECONDS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use IDLE_SECONDS to specify the length of time the operating system waits
before applying idle detection processing to a DOS session.  The field for this
setting shows the amount of idle time allowed in seconds.  Values range from 0
to 60.  To change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the
entry field.

If a program appears idle, DOS gives it less time to run so that other programs
can make use of the time taken from the idle program.  You allow an idle period
for a program, such as a game, that waits a brief time after prompting for your
input but continues activity if you do not respond.  If a program appears to
run slowly when waiting for input, increase the value in this field.

The default value is 0 seconds.  When IDLE_SECONDS is set to 0, the operating
system immediately applies idle detection processing after a program prompts
you for input.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Polling and idle detection, description of
o IDLE_SENSITIVITY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IDLE_SENSITIVITY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use IDLE_SENSITIVITY if you want to specify a threshold for judging when a
program is doing nothing but waiting for input.  The value in this field is a
percentage of the maximum frequency with which a program repeatedly checks, or
polls, for input.  To change the threshold, drag the box, select a button, or
type into the entry field.

If a program polls at a rate greater than the percentage specified in this
field, the program is likely to be idle, so the operating system reduces the
amount of processor time allocated to the session.  By selecting a value in
this field, you prevent the operating system from applying idle detection until
the program reaches a percentage of this predetermined maximum.

Increase the percentage if your program can receive input while running and
seems to run slower than you expect.  If you select 100 in this field, you turn
idle detection off, and the program can poll as often as necessary without
operating system intervention.

The default value is 75 (percent).

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Polling and idle detection, description of
o IDLE_SECONDS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_LASTDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_LASTDRIVE if you want to change the highest disk drive letter name
accessible to the DOS session.  If your session does not access drive Z, or
some range of drives named with letters preceding Z, type the letter name that
identifies the last drive the DOS session reads from or writes to.  You can use
any letter name from A through Z, as long as you do not exclude any disk drive
physically installed on your system.  This setting is similar to the LASTDRIVE=
statement in a DOS CONFIG.SYS.

For example, if you do not want DOS to access network drives, you might make
the last letter C, which represents the hard disk.

The default value is Z.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_VERSION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_VERSION (Simulated version) if you want to run a program that needs a
version of DOS other than 5.0.  The field for this setting provides a place for
you to list program names, each followed by the operating system version number
that the program requires.  If the list grows long, you can scroll the program
names vertically.  You also can scroll horizontally to see a long program name.

The information on each line of the list contains the executable program name,
followed by the version number, a comma, the sub-version number, and a value
indicating how many times the operating system reports the simulated version
identity in response to a version request from your program.  For example, if
your program file is MYPROG.EXE and it runs with DOS version 3.30, type:

MYPROG.EXE,3,30,255

where 255 indicates no limit to the number of times this simulated information
is reported.  If your program MYPROG.EXE requires OS/2* Version 1.1 and you
want this previous version of OS/2 simulated only four times, type:

MYPROG.EXE,10,10,4

For OS/2, type two-digits for each portion of the version identifier.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS_SHELL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HW_NOSOUND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select HW_NOSOUND (Sound inhibit); then select the On radio button if you want
to turn off sound started by a DOS program.  Select Off to turn the sound back
on.

You can turn off one music program to hear another, or to silence a program's
sound when you switch to another window or full screen.  You also can turn off
sound that starts unexpectedly.

The default value for this setting is Off, so that any sound that is part of a
program is heard.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HW_TIMER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use HW_TIMER (Timer Hardware Access) if you want to give a program direct
access to hardware (model 8253) timer ports.  Select the On radio button to
prevent the operating system from trapping, or intercepting, the timer request
and emulating a timer.

Use this setting for timing-critical programs.  Your program might require
direct timer access to avoid the trapping overhead introduced by an emulated
timer.  (An emulated timer does not include in its timing the amount of time
used to trap a timer request.)  Further, some computers poll timer ports,
introducing an additional delay that can become too long when added to trapping
overhead.

A program may not function properly if you select On after the program has
already emulated timing.  The program may not function properly if you change
the setting back to Off after the program directly uses a hardware timer,
because the program then fails to adjust properly for emulated timing.
Selecting On for this setting for multiple DOS sessions can cause programs
running in these sessions to interfere with one another.

The default value is Off, which disables direct access to timer ports.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINT_TIMEOUT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use PRINT_TIMEOUT if you want to specify the number of seconds that elapse
before information is sent from a DOS program to a print spool file.  The
values range from 0 to 3600 seconds.  To change the value, drag the box, select
a button, or type into the entry field.

In DOS, information sent by a program for printing goes directly to a printer.
However, the OS/2* operating system assembles print information in a spool
file.  After a specified period of time, during which the spool file does not
grow larger, OS/2 sends the information to the printer as a single print job.

Increase the value if your DOS session print jobs are improperly divided into
more than one print file.  This may occur for jobs that print large files,
format documents, or run calculations.  Increasing the value of this setting
enables all print information for one job to reach the spooler before the end
of the time limit.

The default value is 15.

Note:   If you select 0, you disable the automatic closing of the spool file.
        When the spool file is not set to close automatically, the spool file
        does not close (and get sent to the printer) until one of the following
        occurs:

o The DOS program ends
o The DOS session ends
o You press Ctrl+Alt+Print Screen at the same time

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TOUCH_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select TOUCH_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS; then select the On radio button if a program you
run in a DOS Window does not respond properly when you touch a touch-sensitive
display (such as the IBM PS/2* Touch Display, Model 8516) that is connected to
the mouse adapter of an IBM Personal System/2*. For example, if a drawing
program does not draw lines when you move your finger across the display
screen, you use TOUCH_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS and select On.  You do not need this
setting for a program running in a DOS full screen session.

When this setting is On, the DOS program reads your position in any area of the
screen you touch.  For example, if you touch the upper-left corner of the
screen, the program reacts as though you are touching the upper-left corner of
the window.  To have the place you touch match the position you want to touch
in the window, make the window the same size as the screen.

The default value is Off.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS
o Enlarging a window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_FASTPASTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use VIDEO_FASTPASTE (Fast paste); then select the On radio button if you want
to increase the speed of character Cut and Paste transfers between the
clipboard and a DOS session.

This setting does not work with programs that monitor keyboard interrupts
directly.  Further, if you use a program that re-buffers keystrokes internally,
that internal buffer can overflow because of a large quantity of
paste-transferred characters.

The default value is Off.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Using a public clipboard


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_MODE_RESTRICTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use VIDEO_MODE_RESTRICTION if you want to remap as user (conventional) memory
the non-visible portion of video memory (beyond address 640KB) for a program
that displays only text or low-resolution graphics, such as those produced by a
CGA (color graphics adapter). The field for this setting contains a list.
Select the arrow to the right of the list to see all the choices.

Selecting CGA (for a program that is text-only or uses low-resolution graphics)
adds 96 kilobytes (KB) to program memory space.  Selecting MONO (for a program
that uses monochrome text) adds 64KB to program memory space.

The DOS_RMSIZE (DOS memory size) setting (RMSIZE) must equal 640KB.

Warning:  Do not use this setting for a program that enables video modes with
higher than CGA or MONO resolutions.  If you use this setting, a program that
enables higher resolution video modes might change program data placed in the
remapped area beyond the address 640KB.

The default value is NONE.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS_RMSIZE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_ONDEMAND_MEMORY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select VIDEO_ONDEMAND_MEMORY  (On-demand memory allocation); then select the
Off radio button if you want to ensure that a full-screen session operates in
the highest resolution video modes.

When you switch from a full-screen session, the system saves the full-screen
video image in a reserved area of memory.  Selecting Off causes the system to
reserve the memory space for saving a video image at the start of a program,
rather than at the time of the screen switch.  Selecting Off might prevent a
program from failing for lack of sufficient memory to save a high-resolution,
full-screen image at the time you switch from the full-screen view.

The default value is On, which (1) causes the system to reserve this memory
space for saving the video image at the time you switch from full-screen, (2)
enables you to start a program quickly, and (3) frees memory space for other
programs.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_RETRACE_EMULATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select VIDEO_RETRACE_EMULATION; then select the Off radio button if you want to
disable frequent video retrace.  When this setting is Off, retrace occurs only
at the interval specific to the video mode of the running DOS program.

A few DOS programs run slower with VIDEO_RETRACE_EMULATION set to On.  Changing
this setting to Off increases the performance, but screen-switching is not as
reliable.  During screen-switching, the program palette may not be restored
correctly; this may result in a blank screen.

The default value is On.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_ROM_EMULATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use VIDEO_ROM_EMULATION; then select the Off radio button if you want to
disable the emulation (in text mode) of these common video functions:
WriteChar, WriteTTY, and full-screen Scroll.  Select Off if your video
read-only-memory (ROM) provides enhancements to these functions.

The default value is On, because the emulated functions enhance performance
over most manufacturers' ROM versions of the same functions.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION (Screen-switch notification); then select the
On radio button if you want to notify a DOS program about a switch between
background and foreground.  If you select On, programs that monitor
screen-switching will save or redraw the screen on a screen-switch.

Select On if the OS/2* video driver does not support all the features offered
by your video adapter and used by your DOS programs.  Use this setting if you
use the VIDEO_ONDEMAND_MEMORY  (On-demand memory allocation) DOS setting,
because concurrent buffer allocation and screen switching can make the screen
go blank.  For WIN-OS/2* sessions, set this setting to On.

For standard monochrome, CGA (color graphics adapter), EGA (enhanced graphics
adapter), and VGA (video graphics adapter) video modes, the OS/2 video driver
should perform adequately with this setting at Off.  If you find your program
redraws too often with this setting on, select Off.

The default value is Off, because most standard video modes do not use
screen-switch notification.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o VIDEO_ONDEMAND_MEMORY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_WINDOW_REFRESH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use VIDEO_WINDOW_REFRESH to adjust the time that elapses before a window is
redrawn.  The values range from 0.1 second to 60.0 seconds (1 minute).  To
change the value, drag the box, select a button, or type into the entry field.

Increase the value, thereby increasing the delay between screen redraws, if you
run a program (such as a graphic program) that writes frequently to video
memory.  Increasing the delay between each write to video memory frees the
processor for other program tasks.  Reduce the value if you find the program
hard to use or because you prefer more frequent screen image updating.  This
setting does not change the rate of scrolling, keyboard input display, or any
video events other than refresh.

To test the effect of changing the value for this setting, test the text output
from a DOS DIR or TYPE command before and after adjusting the setting.

The default value is 0.1, which represents the interval between window updates.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DPMI_DOS_API ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DPMI_DOS_API (DOS API Translation) if your program can use the DPMI (DOS
Protected Mode Interface).  The field for this setting contains a list, and the
selection you make in this list determines whether requests for DOS system
services are translated by the system or by your DOS program.  Translating
means changing the memory address of the initial request from above 1MB
(protected mode memory) to below it (real mode memory) where DOS can access and
fill the request.

o Select AUTO if some of your programs already perform this translation.  You
  can identify a program that translates between upper memory and the lower 1MB
  by documentation stating that the program comes with a DOS extender based on
  the DPMI specification.
o Select ENABLED if you use programs that expect the operating system to
  perform the translation.  An example of a program that relies on the
  operating system to translate is a program written for Windows**.
o Select DISABLED if your programs do not use DPMI.

The default value is Program-selectable.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS Protected Mode Interface


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Polling and Idle Detection: Description of ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When polling, a program repeatedly checks for input.  If the program does no
other processing while polling, it wastes time that other programs can apply
more productively.  In idle detection processing, the operating system compares
the polling rate of a program to a predetermined maximum.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WIN_RUN_MODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This setting is only listed in the WIN-OS/2* Setting window and does not apply
to DOS window or DOS full-screen sessions.

Use WIN_RUN_MODE (Run mode) if you want to specify a mode for your Windows**
programs.  To specify a particular mode, select either the 3.1 Standard or 3.1
Enhanced Compatibility radio button.

The default value for this setting is 3.1 Standard.

You must change this setting before starting a WIN-OS/2 session (or starting
one Windows** program).  To find out how to change the setting, select Changing
DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP; then select the Off radio button if you want
your DOS program to access the model 8514/A or XGA* (extended graphics array)
video directly.  If you select Off, your program might run faster, and you
release the 1 megabyte (1MB) of memory allocated to saving video information in
a DOS session.

If you have this setting Off and you switch from your 8514/A or XGA program,
the screen image might not be correct when you return to the program.  To
correct this problem, set the VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION (Screen-switch
notification) DOS setting to On.  This notifies your DOS program to redraw the
screen.

When VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP is set to Off, you cannot copy information from
that session to the system clipboard, nor can you view the program from a
window.

The default value is On to ensure that the screen image is restored on a screen
switch.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_BACKGROUND_EXECUTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select DOS_BACKGROUND_EXECUTION, then select the On radio button if you want to
allow DOS programs to run in the background.  Selecting On means that your DOS
application will keep running when it is not in the foreground.

When this setting is Off, your program will be suspended when it is not in the
foreground.  When your DOS program is suspended, it will no longer receive
interrupts.  This means there will be no tasking overhead required to support
this DOS session while it is suspended.  Select On if you are running a DOS
program that is communicating using a COM port or a network adapter.  You also
should select On when running WIN-OS/2* DDE or when running a Windows** program
on the desktop.  The default value is On.

You can change this setting before you start the session or at any time after
the DOS session is started.  To find out how to change the setting, select the
topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DPMI_NETWORK_BUFF_SIZE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this setting to control the size, in kilobytes (KB), of the network
translation buffer for DPMI programs in this session.  The default value is 8
KB.  The range is from 1 to 64 KB.

This setting allows you to configure the size of the translation buffer for
DPMI programs, for example, Windows** programs that transfer data over a
network.  If a network-specific Windows program does not run correctly under
OS/2*, increase this setting, then restart the session.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT
o DOS Protected Mode Interface
o DPMI_DOS_API (DOS API translation)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_FILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this setting to specify the maximum number of files that can be open at the
same time in a DOS or WIN-OS/2* session.  Specify a value of 20 to 255. The
default value is 20.  This setting has no effect in an OS/2* session.

When a DOS session is started, 20 file handles are available to all programs
running in the session.  When a WIN-OS/2 session is started, the minimum number
of available file handles is 48.  This number can be increased by the program.
A file is in-use when a program is processing an operation in it.  The file
becomes available when the program finishes its operation and the file is
closed.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WIN_DDE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select WIN_DDE; then select the On radio button to enable sharing of data among
other OS/2* and Windows** programs.  When this setting is On, dynamic data
exchange (DDE) is public.  Windows programs that support DDE automatically
update identical data in other Windows and OS/2 programs, if you select public
DDE on the Data Exchange page from the WIN-OS/2 Setup object, in the System
Setup folder.  Otherwise, you can share information only with other Windows
programs.  When this setting is set to Off, DDE is private and Windows programs
cannot share DDE information with other Windows and OS/2 programs.

Note:   If you are running multiple Windows programs in a single WIN-OS/2*
        session and the program supports the DDE feature, it is possible to
        share DDE information between these programs even when this setting is
        Off (private).

The default value is On (public).

You can change this setting before you start the session or at any time after
the WIN-OS/2 session is started.  To learn more about changing settings, select
a topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WIN_CLIPBOARD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select WIN_CLIPBOARD; then select the On radio button to share clipboard
information among OS/2*, DOS (window), and Windows** programs  When this
setting is On, the clipboard is public.  Windows programs can share data with
other DOS, Windows, and OS/2 programs, if you select public clipboard on the
Data Exchange page from the WIN-OS/2 Setup object, in the System Setup folder.
Otherwise, you can share information only with other Windows programs in that
session.  When this setting is set to Off, the clipboard is private and Windows
programs cannot share clipboard information with other DOS, Windows, and OS/2
programs.

Note:   If you are running multiple Windows programs in a single WIN-OS/2*
        session it is possible to share clipboard information between these
        programs even when this setting is Off (private).

The default value is On (public).

You can change this setting before you start the session or at any time after
the WIN-OS/2 session is started.  To learn more about changing settings, select
a topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> INT_DURING_IO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use INT_DURING_IO (Interrupt During I/O) to enable or disable interrupts during
disk read and write operations. Select the On radio button to allow interrupts
during disk I/O.  This allows programs to receive interrupts while waiting for
the completion of the disk request.  Many multimedia programs need interrupts
during disk read and write operations.  For example, while running Linkway*
programs on CD-ROM.

When this setting is set to Off, interrupts will be disabled until disk I/O is
complete.  The default setting is Off.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To determine how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COM_DIRECT_ACCESS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use COM_DIRECT_ACCESS (COM Direct Access) to give a program direct hardware
access for COM ports  Select the On radio button to track which COM port the
DOS session is using.  The default is Off, which disables direct access to a
COM port.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To determine how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COM_SELECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use COM_SELECT (COM Selected Port Access) to select the COM port for this DOS
session.  The field for this setting contains a list from which you can select
either ALL, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, or NONE.  For example, if you select COM1,
only COM1 can be accessed from this DOS session.

Some DOS programs take control of all available COM ports, even though they
access only one.  Therefore, once this DOS program starts, a COM port cannot be
accessed. COM_SELECT prevents the DOS program that takes control of the
available ports from also taking control of unnecessary resources.

Select NONE if you do not want any COM ports available for the DOS programs you
run in this DOS session.

The default is ALL, which enables all COM ports to be used from this DOS
session.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To determine how to
change the setting, select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o COM_HOLD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS_AUTOEXEC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS_AUTOEXEC (DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT file) if you want to specify the path and
file name of a batch file other than the default AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  The
default AUTOEXEC.BAT file usually resides in the root directory of the startup
drive.  This setting is useful for specifying specific environments for
individual sessions.

The default is blank, which means that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file in the root
directory of the startup drive is used.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DOS Printer Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a specific setting from the following list.  A window appears that
describes the setting in detail, gives its permissible range of values, and
explains how you can change the value field:

o PRINT_TIMEOUT
o PRINT_SEPARATE_OUTPUT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINT_SEPARATE_OUTPUT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select PRINT_SEPARATE_OUTPUT and then select the Off radio button if you want
to disable the separation of printer output coming from two or more DOS
programs running in the same DOS session and going to the same output device.
This setting is effective primarily when the spooler is enabled.

In DOS, information sent by a program for printing goes directly to a printer.
However, the OS/2* operating system assembles the information in a spool file
and then sends the spool file to the printer as a single print job.

Normally, the spooler is enabled (the default value) and the
PRINT_SEPARATE_OUTPUT DOS setting is On.  In this case, when two or more
programs are running in the same DOS session and you send data from these
programs to the same output device, the OS/2 operating system keeps the data
from each program in separate spool files. The separation of the data into
these files takes place when one of the following occurs:

o The DOS program ends
o The DOS session ends
o You press Ctrl+Alt+Print Screen at the same time
o The time limit for the PRINT_TIMEOUT DOS setting expires.  For more
  information about this setting, select PRINT_TIMEOUT from the Related
  Information list below.

The default value for this setting is On, which separates the printer output
for each DOS program that is running in the same DOS session.

You must change this setting before starting the session.  To find out how to
change the setting, select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list
below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o PRINT_TIMEOUT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> AUDIO_ADAPTER_SHARING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select AUDIO_ADAPTER_SHARING to select access to audio hardware for this DOS
session.

Two applications cannot use the same audio adapter at the same time.  Also,
some DOS programs attempt to use an audio adapter even if one is not required
to run the program.  AUDIO_ADAPTER_SHARING allows you to minimize conflicts by
defining audio specifications for each DOS session.

Select Optional to indicate that a program in this DOS session should use an
audio adapter if one is available.

Select Required to indicate that a program in this DOS session must have access
to an audio adapter.  When this setting is selected, you will see an error
message if a program attempts to use the audio adapter while it is being used
by another program.

Select None to indicate that a program in this DOS session does not require an
audio adapter.

The default is Optional.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> COM_RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select COM_RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH to control the content of the received data
buffers when the received data interrupt is enabled by a DOS program or when a
DOS session is switched from the background to the foreground.  The field for
this setting contains a list from which you can select Receive Data Interrupt
Enable, Switch to Foreground, ALL, or NONE.

Some DOS programs require that communications data be discarded when the
program is switched to the foreground; other DOS programs require that the data
be kept.  You can use COM_RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH to override the program setting
and discard or keep the communication data for all programs in this DOS
session.

Select Receive Data Interrupt Enable to indicate that, for this DOS session,
the operating system is to discard data in the received data buffer when the
DOS program enables the received data interrupt.

Select Switch to Foreground to indicate that, for this DOS session, the
operating system is to discard data in the received data buffer when the DOS
program is switched to the foreground.

Select ALL to indicate that communications data be discarded when a DOS program
enables the received data interrupt or the program is switched to the
foreground.

Select NONE to indicate that, for this DOS session, the operating system is to
keep data in the received data buffer.

The default is NONE.

You can change the setting for this session at any time.  To find out how to
change the setting, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Help for Font Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Font Palette to change, delete or add fonts, as well as display samples of
some of the fonts currently available on your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. Help for Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Startup to specify all the programs you want to begin when your system is
started.  Startup is intended to contain programs that are to be started during
system initialization but might go away shortly after.  For example, a batch
file that starts a network server or requester is a typical use.  You can drag
a copy of the object you want to begin at startup time to the Startup folder.

Related Information:

o Starting Programs at System Startup
o File and directory concepts
o Batch files
o File systems
o Types of files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Lockup Now ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Lockup now to immediately restrict access to your computer by locking the
keyboard and mouse.  If you have never locked your keyboard and mouse, the
Password window is displayed.  For additional help, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.  (If you have locked the keyboard and mouse
before, you have already specified a password.)

To change your password, display the pop-up menu for the desktop, select the
arrow to the right of Open, select Settings; then select the Lockup tab.  For
additional help, select the Help push button after the Lockup page is
displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Help for Command Prompts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Command Prompts for access to the OS/2* Full Screen and OS/2 Window command
prompts.  If you chose to install DOS, Win-OS/2* and Dual Boot support then the
DOS Window, DOS Full Screen, Win-OS/2 Full Screen and Dual Boot objects are
also displayed.

The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating system was
installed.

Related Information:

o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS session
o Working with a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Dual Boot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Dual Boot to switch from the OS/2* operating system to a version of DOS
installed on your hard disk.  You can select this object only if the DOS and
OS/2 operating systems exist in the same primary partition.

Related Information:

Adding OS/2 to a DOS System


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS from Drive A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS from Drive A to start DOS versions from 3.0 to 5.0 which are bootable
from a DOS startup diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use OS/2 full screen to display the OS/2* command prompt in a full screen
session.

To see the windows and icons that are hidden, press Alt+Esc, or press Ctrl+Esc
to display the Window List.

If you switch out of OS/2 full screen while a program is running, the OS/2 Full
Screen icon is displayed in the Command Prompts folder.  Below the icon you
will see the name of the running program.  If the program ends while the icon
is displayed, the program name is removed and OS/2 Full Screen is displayed
below the icon.

Related Information:

o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting an OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for OS/2 Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use OS/2 window to display the OS/2* command prompt in a window.

Click on the title-bar icon to display the menu, and then select from the
choices to:

o Change the size of the characters that are displayed in the window
o Turn scrolling on or off
o Mark text or graphics that you want to duplicate in another session
o Place marked text or graphics in the OS/2 clipboard
o Place a duplicate of all text or graphics in this window in the OS/2
  clipboard
o Place in this window a duplicate of the text or graphics in the OS/2
  clipboard.

When a program runs in an OS/2 window, the title bar changes.  When the program
starts, the title bar changes to the program title.  Assume you have an editor
named ABC.  The window title would change from OS/2 Window to ABC.  When a
program ends in an OS/2 window, Completed: is displayed before the program
title on the title bar.  For example,

   Completed: ABC

If you hide an OS/2 window while a program is running, the OS/2 Window icon is
displayed in the Command Prompts folder.  Below the icon you will see the name
of the running program.  If the program ends while the window is hidden, the
program name is removed and OS/2 Window is displayed below the icon.

Some conditions require that a program use the full screen instead of a window.
You must use the full screen when the program:

o Needs access to the physical screen selector
o Must use the graphics mode of the display adapter
o Uses the OS/2 monitor facility
o Calls DosDevIOCtl directly
o Attempts to register replacements for the Vio, Kbd, or Mou subsystems of the
  operating system.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Copying text using the System Editor
o Using a private OS/2 clipboard
o Using Clipboard Viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting an OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS full screen to display the DOS command prompt in a full screen session.

To see the windows and icons that are hidden, press Alt+Esc, or press Ctrl+Esc
to display the Window List.

In the pop-up menu, select from the choices to:

o Display the contents of this full screen session in a window
o Place a duplicate of all text or graphics in this window in the OS/2*
  clipboard
o Place in this full-screen session a duplicate of the text or graphics in the
  OS/2 clipboard
o Change the values of the DOS settings that apply to this DOS window.

If you switch out of DOS full screen while a program is running, the DOS Full
Screen icon is displayed in the Command Prompts folder.  Below the icon you
will see the name of the running program.  If the program ends while the icon
is displayed, the program name is removed and DOS Full Screen is displayed
below the icon.

Related Information:

o Copying and moving information (clipboard)
o Copying text using the System Editor
o Using a private OS/2 clipboard
o Using Clipboard Viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting a DOS session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for DOS Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use DOS window to display the DOS command prompt in a window.

In the pop-up menu, select from the choices to:

o Change the size of the characters that are displayed in the window
o Turn scrolling on or off
o Display the contents of this window in a full screen
o Mark text or graphics that you want to duplicate in another session
o Place marked text or graphics in the OS/2* clipboard
o Place a duplicate of all text or graphics in this window in the OS/2
  clipboard
o Place in this window a duplicate of the text or graphics in the OS/2
  clipboard
o Change the values of the DOS settings that apply to this DOS window.

When a program runs in a DOS window, the title bar changes.  When the program
starts, the title bar changes to the program title.  Assume you have an editor
named ABC.  The window title would change from DOS Window to ABC.  When a
program ends in a DOS window, Completed: is displayed before the program title
on the title bar.  For example,

   Completed: ABC

If you hide a DOS window while a program is running, the DOS Window icon is
displayed in the Command Prompts folder.  Below the icon you will see the name
of the running program.  If the program ends while the window is hidden, the
program name is removed and DOS Window is displayed below the icon.

Related Information:

o Copying and moving information (clipboard)
o Copying text using the System Editor
o Using a private OS/2 clipboard
o Using Clipboard Viewer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting a DOS session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Win-OS/2 Full Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Win-OS/2 full screen to display the Win-OS/2* program in a full screen
session with more than one running program.

Related Information:

o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Working with a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Help for Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Drives for access to diskette drives and hard disk drives.

The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating system was
installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Diskette Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on a diskette.

Related Information:

o File and directory concepts
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data objects
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Hard Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on the hard disk.

Related Information:

o File and directory concepts
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data objects
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. Help for Check Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Check Disk to determine the type of file system in use and the amount of
storage space remaining on the diskette or the hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Help for Format Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Format Disk to prepare partitions on the hard disk or diskette for first
time use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. Help for Copy Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Copy disk to copy the contents of the diskette in the source drive to the
diskette in the target drive.  The target diskette will be formatted during the
copy process, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. Help for Create Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Create Partition to create or delete partitions for the hard disk and to
create or destroy logical disks.  If you select this choice, the FDISK window
is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Tape Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on a tape drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for RAM Drives (VDISK) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on a RAM drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for CD-ROM Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on a CD-ROM drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Network Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this drive folder to display the objects on a network drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. Help for Scheme Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Scheme Palette to change the colors or fonts for the window parts.  For
example, you can change any of the current settings for colors or fonts for
window text, menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds.  In addition, you can
change the width of your horizontal and vertical window borders.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. Help for Scheme Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Scheme Palette to change the colors or fonts for the window parts.  For
example, you can change any of the current settings for colors or fonts for
window text, menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds.  In addition, you can
change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.  The Palette
window shows different schemes you can use and the effects of changing the
screen color or window parts.  Changes to a scheme are displayed in the Palette
window.

To select a window-scheme design:

 1. Select a Scheme from the list.
 2. Drag the design choice displayed in the Sample window to an active window
    to activate the design.

Press and hold the Alt key and use mouse button 2 to drag the scheme sample to
the desktop to change all the windows.  If you drop the scheme sample on an
open window, only that window changes to the selected scheme.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Edit scheme

Related Information:

Dragging an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Scheme ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit Scheme to display a window that enables you to create new window
schemes or change the existing window schemes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Scheme ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can customize the window schemes that came with your system or create your
own.  The sample window is an area where you can view the changes you make and
determine which items you want to change.

o Scheme title
o Window area
o Edit color
o Border width
o Sample window
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Scheme Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field displays the title of the scheme you selected from the Scheme
Palette window.  You can type the name of the scheme you want in the Scheme
title field, then press enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window Area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field lists the choices available to change your screen and window parts.
Select the arrow to the right to view all of the choices, then select one from
the list.  For example, select Screen background to make changes to the color
of your screen background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit Color to display a window in which you can change the color of any
of the window parts.  Refer to the sample window at the left side of the Edit
Scheme window to identify the window part you want to change.  Then select that
window part from the Window area field.  After you change the color and close
the Edit Color window, the color change is reflected in the sample window in
Edit Scheme window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit font to display the Font palette window.  You can change the font
for any text in a window part.  The Sample window shows the effect of changing
the text font.

 1. Move the mouse pointer to a font.
 2. Hold down mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the font to the text you want to change.
 4. Release mouse button 2.

Related Information:

Dragging an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Border Width ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Border width to change the width of the horizontal and vertical window
borders. Select the arrows next to Horizontal and Vertical to increase or
decrease the horizontal and vertical window border width.  The higher the
number, the wider the border.  Wider borders are easier to manipulate with a
mouse, but they also take up more space on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sample Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Sample window shows the effect of changing the screen color or window
parts.  For example, if you select Window text from the Window parts list and
then change the color of the text, those changes are reflected in the Sample
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Print Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Print Screen to print the full screen or an open window in an OS/2 session.

To print a full screen:

 1. Select the Enable radio button.
 2. Close the notebook.
 3. Place the pointer on the desktop away from any open windows.
 4. Press Print Screen.

To print an open window:

 1. Select the Enable radio button.
 2. Close the notebook.
 3. Place the pointer in any open window.
 4. Press Print Screen.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Enable
o Disable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Enable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Enable radio button to start the print screen function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Disable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Disable to stop the print screen function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can view and change the settings for an install program.  An install
program is either an executable file (file with an .EXE extension) or a command
file (file with a .BAT or .COM extension or a REXX command file).  The install
program can be referred to by the install object or it can be contained within
the install object.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Install program
o Run options
o Set


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Install Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Install program group box to specify the install program you want to
use.  You can type the name of the install program in the Program to run field.
Select the Copy to install radio button to copy the install program to the
install object.  Select the Let install object refer to program radio button so
the install object can reference the install program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Run Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Run options group box to specify parameters to run the install program.
You can type the install program parameters in the Parameters field.  There are
two system defined parameter variables:

%1   The directory name for the location to install the program.  This path is
     to the drag and drop target folder.

%2   The directory name for the location of the program being installed (for
     example, the folder containing the install object).

You can type the path of the working directory in the Working directory field.

Select the Normal radio button to run the program in a normal sized window.
Select the Minimized/hidden radio button to run the program in a hidden window.
Select the Maximized radio button to run the program in a maximized window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Set to establish the install program options and parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to copy objects.  Before you copy an object, consider that you
might copy over an already existing file with the same name.  The Object field
lists the selected objects. The Copy push button is only displayed when the
confirmation is set to on.  Use Pause to pause the copy process before the next
file is copied.  Use Resume to continue the copy process.

Note:   If you do not want to copy all the remaining objects, you can deselect
        those that you do not want to copy while the copy process is paused.

Use Cancel to stop the copy process.

The following descriptions are only displayed when the Confirm on copy, move,
create shadow check box is selected in the settings notebook for the OS/2
System object.  Use the following  radio buttons to:

Prompt when names conflict
                    Displays a message with choices that enable you to rename
                    the source object, replace the target object or append the
                    source object to the target object.

Auto-rename object
                    Renames the new object by adding a colon and a number next
                    to the original name.  For example, the duplicate object,
                    Data File, would be renamed Data File:1.

Replace existing object
                    Replaces the existing object with the new object of the
                    same name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to move objects.  The Object lists the selected objects. The
Move push button is only displayed when the confirmation is set to on.  Use
Pause to pause the move process before the next file is moved.  Use Resume to
continue the move process.

Note:   If you do not want to move all the remaining objects, you can deselect
        those that you do not want to move while the move process is paused.

Use Cancel to stop the move process.

The following descriptions are only displayed when the Confirm on copy, move,
create shadow check box is selected in the settings notebook for the OS/2
System object.  Use the following  radio buttons to:

Prompt when names conflict
                    Displays a message with choices that enable you to rename
                    the source object, replace the target object or append the
                    source object to the target object.

Auto-rename object
                    Renames the new object by adding a colon and a number next
                    to the original name.  For example, the duplicate object,
                    Data File, would be renamed Data File:1.

Replace existing object
                    Replaces the existing object with the new object of the
                    same name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Create a Shadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to create shadow objects.  The Object field lists the selected
objects.  The Create push button is only displayed when the confirmation is set
to on.  Use Pause to pause the create shadow process before the next file is
copied.  Use Resume to continue the create shadow process.

Note:   If you do not want to create shadows of all the remaining objects, you
        can deselect those that you do not want to shadow while the create
        shadow process is paused.

Use Cancel to stop the create shadow process.

The following descriptions are only displayed when the Confirm on copy, move,
create shadow check box is selected in the settings notebook for the OS/2
System object.  Use the following radio buttons to:

Prompt when names conflict
                    Displays a message with choices that enable you to rename
                    the source object, replace the target object or append the
                    source object to the target object.

Auto-rename object
                    Renames the new object by adding a colon and a number next
                    to the original name.  For example, the duplicate object,
                    Data File, would be renamed Data File:1.

Replace existing object
                    Replaces the existing object with the new object of the
                    same name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Names Conflict ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The target folder already has an object with the same name as the object you
are trying to place in the folder (the source object).

Use this window to confirm the name of the source object you want to place in
the target folder.  You can rename the source object, replace the target object
or append the source object to the target object.

The following are descriptions of the radio buttons in the window:

Rename object
                    Renames the new object by adding a colon and a number next
                    to the original name.  For example, the duplicate object,
                    Data File, would be renamed Data File:1.  You can change
                    the name in the field by clicking on it and then typing the
                    new name.

Replace existing object
                    Replaces the existing object with the new object of the
                    same name.

Append to existing object
                    Adds the information in the source object to the
                    information in the existing object which is in the target
                    folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Help for Check Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This enables you to specify how diskettes and the hard disk will be checked.

Note:   Check disk gives accurate information only when a hard disk is not in
        use.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the OS/2 Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Write corrections
o Check
o Cancel

Related Information:

o CHKDSK
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Help for Write Corrections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to fix errors on the diskette or hard disk while it is
being checked.  The system will write corrections directly to the diskette.
However, it cannot write corrections to the hard disk if it currently has open
files.  If the hard disk has separate partitions, the system can write
corrections to a partition other than the one currently in use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Help for Check ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Check to check a diskette or hard disk for total disk space, space
available, type of file system used and current disk usage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Help for Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This notebook page displays the current information about the diskette or hard
disk you select.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. Help for Check Disk Results ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can display the current information about a diskette or the hard disk.

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Type of file system
o Total disk space
o Space available on disk
o Current disk usage
o Cancel

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Help for Current Disk Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows a chart of how the disk is currently being used.  A
color-coded legend shows how much of the disk is occupied by directories, user
files, unusable areas, extended attributes (ea's) and how much space is
reserved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Help for Format Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare a hard disk for first time use, you must format the disk.
Formatting a disk removes any information previously stored on that disk and
prepares the disk so it can store new information.  Be sure to check the hard
disk before you format it or you may destroy important files.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Help for Volume Label
o Help for Type of File System
o Cancel
o Format
o FORMAT
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Help for Volume Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type the label of the diskette or hard disk in the Volume Label field.  The
volume label can be up to 11 characters long.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

Related Information:

o LABEL
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. Help for Capacity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to the right to display the appropriate diskette capacity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. Help for Format Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare a diskette for first time use, you must format the disk.  Formatting
a disk removes any information previously stored on that disk and prepares the
disk so it is compatible with the drive on your computer.  Be sure to check the
diskette or hard disk before you format it or you may destroy important files.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Help for Volume Label
o Help for Capacity
o Cancel
o Format
o FORMAT
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Help for Percent Complete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This slider indicates the percentage of the diskette that is already formatted.
This is not a changeable field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Help for Type of File System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This indicates the type of file system being used. The file allocation table
(FAT) file system is used to format diskettes.  Either FAT or the high
performance file system (HPFS) is used to format the hard disk.

Related Information:

o High Performance File System (HPFS)
o File allocation table (FAT)
o File systems
o File and directory concepts
o Files with extended attributes
o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o File and directory concepts
o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. Help for Format in Progress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window displays how much of the diskette or hard disk has been formatted.

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Help for percent complete
o Total disk space
o Space available on disk
o Stop


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. Help for Total Disk Space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This indicates the total number of bytes on the diskette or hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Help for Space Available for Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This indicates the number of bytes available for storage on the diskette or
hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Help for Format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Format to prepare a diskette or hard disk to store information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Help for Stop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Stop to cancel the format process and close the Format in Progress
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Help for Format Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare a diskette for first time use, you must format the disk.  Formatting
a disk removes any information previously stored on that disk and prepares the
disk so it is compatible with the drive on your computer.  Be sure to check the
diskette or hard disk before you format it or you may destroy important files.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Help for Volume Label
o Cancel
o Format
o FORMAT
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Help for Format Optical Disc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare an optical disc for first time use, you must format the disc.
Formatting an optical disc removes any information previously stored on that
disc and prepares the disc so data can be read from it or written to it by the
operating system.  Be sure to check the optical disc before you format it or
you may destroy important files.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

For a detailed explanation of each item, select from the list below:

o Help for Volume Label
o Help for Long Format
o Cancel
o Format
o FORMAT
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Help for Long Format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to format an optical disc before you use it the first
time.  This procedure prepares the optical disc so data can be read from it or
written to it by the operating system.  This procedure takes about 20 minutes.

After your optical disc has been formatted, you can reformat it in only a few
minutes by making sure this check box is not selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Help for Font Palette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font Palette window displays samples of some of the fonts currently
available on your system.  You can drag a font sample from a sample field and
drop it on any text in the desktop.  The font of that text changes to the font
in the selected sample field.  You can also press and hold Alt; then drag the
font sample to a particular text field.  All the fields of that type will
change to the selected font.

Select Edit font so you can add, delete, and edit font samples. You can also
double-click on the Font Palette window to display the Edit font window.

For a detailed explanation of the field, select below:

o Edit font


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit font to display a window that enables you to change the font
facename and size in the selected font sample field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Edit font to add new fonts, delete fonts, or to change the settings of the
fonts currently available on your system, as well as change the size, style,
and the way a font is emphasized.  Select Add to add a new font.  Select Delete
to delete a font.  For additional help, select the Help push button after the
window is displayed.

To change a font:

 1. Select the arrow to the right of the field you want to change or select a
    check box in the Emphasis field.
 2. Select a new font, style, size, or emphasis or any combination of fields
    you want.

    The Sample field displays a sample of the font, style and emphasis you
    selected.

Note:   Some countries require that the size and contrast of characters on a
        display screen meet Standard 9241 Part 3 of the International
        Organization for Standardization (ISO) and the German DIN 66234
        Standard.  Fonts specified in these standards produce characters that
        are easy to read.

If you select an OS/2 2.1 font that does not comply with these standards, a
message will be displayed in the window.

To comply with these standards, select a font that does not cause the message
to be displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Name
o Size
o Style
o Emphasis
o Add
o Delete
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select from the fonts, currently available on your system.
Select the arrow to the right to display all the available fonts, then select
the font you want.  The font you choose displays in the selected font sample
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to display the the point size of the current font.  To change
the value, select the arrows to the right to display all the available point
sizes; then select a new size.  The larger the number, the larger the point
size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to display the style of the current font. Select the arrow to
the right to display a list of the different styles available; then select the
one you want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Emphasis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to change the way a font is emphasized.  Selecting Outline
displays an outline around each character of the font. Selecting Underline
underlines the characters.  Selecting Strikeout strikes a line through the
characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to display the Add Font window.  From this window you can add fonts
to the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to display the Delete Font window. From this window you can
delete those fonts you no longer need.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Follow the instructions on the screen, then select Add.  For additional help,
select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Add
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to display the Add New Font window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add New Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add fonts from a diskette, to the hard disk or another diskette:

 1. Select the arrow to the right of the Font files field to display the fonts
    you can add to the system.
 2. Select the name or names of the fonts you want to add from the Font files
    field.  The font files are copied to the C:\OS2\PSFONTS directory unless
    you change the directory.
 3. Select the Add push button.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Font files
o Font names
o Copy to
o Add
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to display the font files you can add from the diskette to the
hard disk. Select the files you want to add; then select Add.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to display the names of the fonts located in the font files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Copy To ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to type the path where you want to add fonts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to add a new font to the drive and directory specified in the Copy
to field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to display the Delete Font window.  From this window you can
delete those fonts you no longer need.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove font files from the hard disk.

 1. Select the arrow to the right of the Font files field to display the fonts
    you can delete.
 2. Select the name of the font file that you want to delete from the Font
    files list.
 3. Select the Delete push button.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Font files
o Font names
o Delete
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to remove font files from the hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to display the font files you can delete from the hard disk.
Select the files you want to delete; then select Delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Help for Lockup: Page 3 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can type a password that enables you to unlock the keyboard and mouse after
you lock your system.

To unlock your system, type your password and press Enter.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Password
o Password (for verification)

You can perform other tasks from Lockup pages 1 or 2.  Select the left arrow at
the bottom of the window to see Lockup page 1 or 2.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Help for Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to type a password. Your password can be up to 15 characters
long.  The longer you make your password, the harder it will be for someone to
guess what it is. The characters you choose will not be displayed as you type
them.  Be sure to remember what you type because you will have to press Tab to
go to the Password (for verification) field and type the password again.

Warning:  If you forget your password and have not selected the Lock on startup
check box, you can turn the computer off, and then on, to unlock the keyboard
and mouse.  If this check box is selected, you must reconfigure the OS2.INI
file to disable the Lock on startup option.  To learn about this procedure,
select Help for Lock on Startup in the Related Information list below.

When you turn the computer off, you lose any information that you did not save
before you locked the keyboard and mouse.  Remember to save your information
often.

Be sure to take other precautions to prevent someone from gaining access to
your information:

o If your computer has a keylock, lock the computer and put the key in a safe
  place.
o If you have a hard disk and can specify a power-on password, be sure to do
  so.

Related Information:

Help for Lock on Startup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Help for Password (for verification) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to type the same characters as you did in the Password field.
The characters will not be displayed as you type them.  When you finish typing
the verification password, select Ok; your password will be set. A message is
displayed only if your password and password for verification do not have the
same characters.  Remember your password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Lockup: Page 2 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify which image is displayed on the screen when the keyboard and
mouse are locked.  You can specify how the image is displayed on the screen and
how much of the screen is covered. You can have the image removed after a
specified amount of time.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o File
o Create Another
o Edit
o Size
o Display
o Undo
o Default

You can perform other tasks from Lockup pages 1 or 3.  Select the right or left
arrow at the bottom of the window to see Lockup page 1 or 3.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to specify how the image is displayed on the screen when you
lock the keyboard and mouse.

Normal image
          Displays the image as it was originally created.

Tiled image
          Displays the image as it was originally created, with a portion of it
          repeated to cover the full screen.

Scaled image
          Displays the image repeatedly.  The number of images displayed is
          determined by the value in the box next to Scaled image.

          Select the arrows in the box next to Scaled image to specify the
          number of scaled images that are to appear on the screen. For
          example, if you specify 6x6 in the box next to the Scaled Image
          field, you will see 36 images displayed on the screen (6 horizontally
          by 6 vertically).  If you have a high resolution display adapter,
          select Scaled image with 1x1 specified to display the image so it
          covers the full screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the image that is displayed when you lock the keyboard
and mouse.  Select the arrow to the right to display a list of image files;
then select a file.  A sample of the image is displayed to the left of the Size
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the radio buttons to specify how much of the screen is to be
covered with the image or to have the image removed after a specified amount of
time.

Partial screen
          Does not cover the full screen with the image.

Full screen
          Covers the full screen with the image.  If you have a high resolution
          display adapter, select Scaled image with 1x1 specified to display
          the image so it covers the full screen.

Auto-dim
          Protects the screen from damage.  This choice is available only when
          Full screen is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit to display the Icon Editor, which enables you to change patterns
and images.  For additional help, use the help available in the Icon Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Lockup: Page 1 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify if you want the keyboard and mouse to lock automatically, or
you can change the time limit for the Automatic lockup choice.  You also can
have the system locked each time you turn it on or restart it.

Initially, the Automatic lockup choice is not selected.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o No automatic lockup
o Automatic lockup
o Timeout
o Lock on startup
o Undo
o Default

You can perform other tasks from Lockup pages 2 or 3.  Select the right arrow
at the bottom of the window to see Lockup page 2 or 3.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for No Automatic Lockup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select No automatic lockup to indicate that you, not the system, will control
when your keyboard and mouse will be locked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Automatic Lockup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Automatic lockup to have the system automatically lock your keyboard and
mouse if you have not used them for the time specified in the Timeout field.
You can still lock your system immediately after you select the Automatic
lockup radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Timeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the arrows to the right of Timeout to specify the amount of time you want
to elapse before your system automatically locks the keyboard and mouse.  You
can specify a time limit from 1 to 99 minutes.  If you do not specify a time,
the system will lock the keyboard and mouse after 3 minutes.

Note:   The keyboard and mouse cannot be locked automatically if a DOS or OS/2*
        full-screen is displayed. To avoid this situation, switch to any
        window.  An icon is displayed at the bottom of the screen to remind you
        about the DOS or OS/2 full-screen. If a program is running when you
        switch, it will continue to run.  When it is complete, the words below
        the icon change to "DOS" or "OS/2."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Help for Lock on Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box to have your system locked each time you turn it on or
press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.  The Lock on startup option is
recommended only when a secure environment is desired.

Warning:  If you forget your password and this option is selected, you must use
the LOCK.RC file located in the \OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file
and be able to restart your system.  To do this, do the following:

 1. Restart the system from the Installation Diskette.
 2. Insert Diskette 1 when prompted by the system.
 3. Press Esc to display a full-screen OS/2* command prompt.
 4. Change from drive A to the drive on which the OS/2 operating system is
    installed by typing the drive letter followed by a colon (for example, C:).
 5. Change directory (CD) to the OS/2 subdirectory.
 6. Type the following at the command prompt:

        MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC

 7. Restart your system.

This procedure disables the Lock on startup option so that you can start your
system without using the forgotten password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Help for Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can add, delete, or change the menus in a pop-up menu for a selected
object.  Or you can add, delete, or change the menu items in a cascaded menu
for one of the menus in the pop-up menu.

For example, you can add the name of a program to a pop-up menu or a cascaded
menu and then associate the name to the file that starts the program.  Then
when you select the name of the program from the menu, the program will start.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Available menus
o Actions on menu
o Create another
o Settings
o Delete
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Help for Available Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Available menus list box contains the menus you can modify for the selected
object.  For example, on the pop-up menu for the desktop, you can modify that
primary pop-up menu or the Open menu.

Use the Create another, Delete, or Settings push buttons to right of Available
menus to add a menu, delete a menu, or change the settings of a menu (its name
or menu type).

When you select a menu in this list box, a list is displayed in the Actions on
menu list box.  It contains the menu items you can modify for the menu that is
selected in the Available menus list box.  For example, if you are in the
settings notebook for the desktop and you select Open in the Available menus
list box, you will see the menu items for the Open menu (Settings, Icon view,
Tree view, and Details view) displayed in the Actions on menu list box.  You
can use the push buttons to the right of Actions on menu to delete a menu item,
add a new item, or change the settings of an item (its name or the program it
is associated with).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Help for Actions on Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Actions on menu list box contains a list of the menu items you can modify
for the menu that is selected in the Available menus list box.

Use the Create another, Delete, or Settings push buttons to the right of
Actions on menu to add a menu item, delete an item, or change the settings of
an item (its name or the program it is associated with).

Note:   Make sure the menu selected in the Available menus list box is the menu
        you want to modify.

You can add a menu item to a pop-up and associate its name with a program.
Then when you select the menu item, the program is started.  For example, you
can add the name of your favorite editor to a pop-up menu and associate it to
the editing program.  Then when you select the pop-up item name for the editor,
the program will start.

To add a program association to a pop-up menu:

 1. Select a menu in the Available menus list box.
 2. Drag a program object or program-file object to the Actions on menu list
    box and drop the object on the list box.  The new menu item will have the
    same name as the program object or program-file object.

Or, use the Create another push button and then the Settings push button.

Note:   When you add a program name to a pop-up menu, the desktop considers the
        name of the program as a parameter.  When you select the program name
        from the menu, the desktop sends the name of the program to the program
        as a parameter.  Some programs, such as COMMAND.EXE, COMMAND.COM, and
        DOS and OS/2* sessions, cannot accept their own names as a parameter.
        When the name is passed to the program, the program will not start and
        an error message is displayed.  To enable the program to start from the
        pop-up menu, you can stop the name of the program from being sent to
        the program by doing the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object or program-file object that
    you named when you added the program association to the pop-up menu.  For
    example, if you have a program object named My Favorite Editor, you will
    display the pop-up menu for that object.
 2. Select Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Program tab.
 5. Type the following in the Parameters field:

           %

 6. Close the Settings notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create another to create a new menu item.  The fields in the secondary
window are empty when you select Create another for a user-defined menu item.
This enables you add a new menu item to the pop-up menu for the currently
selected object.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Help for Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Settings to view or change the settings for the currently selected menu
item.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to remove the currently selected menu item from the menu.
System-added entries cannot be deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window displays the settings for the currently selected pop-up menu item,
for the currently selected object.  You can change the name and menu type for
the menu item displayed in the Menu name field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Menu name
o Menu type
o Default action
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu name field displays the name of the currently selected pop-up menu
item for the currently selected object.  To change the name of the menu item,
type a new name in the Menu name field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu type field specifies the characteristics for the currently selected
pop-up menu item, for the currently selected object.  Select the Cascade menu
radio button to specify that the item in the Menu name field is to be a
cascaded-menu item.  Select the Conditional cascade radio button to specify
that the item in the Menu name field is to have an arrow button that displays
its own cascaded menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the arrow to the right of the field to display all the default actions
available for the menu item displayed in the Menu name field.  Select an action
from the Default action field to change the default action for the current
conditional cascade.  A check mark beside an action indicates that action as
the default action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu Item Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window displays the settings for the currently selected, cascaded-menu
item.  You can change the name and program function for the menu item displayed
in the Menu item name field.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Menu item name
o Program
o Name
o Find program
o Undo


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu Item Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu item name field displays the name of the currently selected,
cascaded-menu item.  To change the name of the menu item, type a new name in
the Menu item name field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Program field displays the program function for the currently selected,
cascaded-menu item.  To change the program function for the menu item, select
the Find program push button.  The program function associated with the
currently selected, cascaded-menu item is displayed in the Name field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Name to view the program function associated with the currently selected,
cascaded-menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find program to locate the program references available in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. Help for Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Background to select an image to display in the background of any folder,
including the desktop.  You can have different images in different folders
displayed at the same time.  For example, the OS/2* logo in this operating
system is an image.  You also can change the color of your folders.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Background Type
o Change color
o Image
o File
o Create another
o Edit
o Find
o Display
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Background Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select a color or image to display in the background of any
folder. Select Image or Color to indicate what you want to change in the
background of the folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change color to change the background color of the folder.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Image ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field displays a list of available images.  Select an arrow to the right
to view all the choices.  If you select an image, it is displayed immediately.
If you have a high resolution display adapter, select Scaled image with 1x1
specified, to display the image so it covers the full screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list shows the files available to you.  Select the arrow to the right to
view all of the choices.  Select a file from the list to display the image
immediately.  Background bitmaps are stored in the OS2\BITMAP directory.

Note:   To remove the background image, select None from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Create Another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create another to display the Icon Editor, a program you can use to
create images or icons.  Select Help in the Icon Editor for help in creating an
image or icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit to edit images or icons with the Icon Editor. Select Help in the
Icon Editor for help in editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find to display a window that enables you to search for an image.  For
additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Finding an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a radio button to set up how you want the image to appear on the folder.

Normal image
          Displays the image as it was originally created.

Tiled image
          Displays the image with part of it repeated to cover the full folder.

Scaled image
          Displays the image repeatedly.  The number of scaled images is
          determined by the value next to Scaled image.

          Select the arrows next to Scaled image to specify the number of
          scaled images that are to appear on the folder.  For example, if you
          specify 6x6 next to the Scaled image field, you will see 36 images
          displayed on the folder (6 horizontally by 6 vertically). If you have
          a high resolution display adapter, select Scaled image with 1x1
          specified, to display the image so it covers the full screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Type the name of the object you want to find.  You can use an asterisk (*),
    a global file-name character, to represent any character.
 2. Select an object type from the list.
 3. Select Locate to display a notebook page with tabs that enables you to
    specify where you want to start searching for an object.
 4. Select Search just this folder or Search all subfolders.
 5. Select the Find push button.

If you have selected Find from a pop-up menu, one of the following events will
occur when the search is completed:

o If you selected Search just this folder, a Find Results folder containing the
  objects found in this folder is created and opened automatically.
o If you selected Search all subfolders, a Find Results folder is displayed
  that includes objects in all subfolders.
o If the search was unsuccessful, a message is displayed informing you that no
  objects matching the specified criteria were found.

If you select the Find push button from a notebook page, a Find Results window
is displayed from which you can select the object that you want.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Name
o Object types
o Search just this folder
o Search all subfolders
o Find
o Locate
o Cancel

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field is used to identify the name of the objects you want to find.
You can include an asterisk (*), a global file-name character to represent any
character or characters in the name.  For example, if you type

clock*

the search result includes all the selected object types that have clock as the
first five letters of their name.

Related Information:

Global file-name characters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the object types for which you can specify a search. For
example, if you want to search only for data files, you select Data file
objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search Just This Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this radio button to limit the search to the current folder.  If you
want the search to include all folders within the named folder, select the
radio button next to Search all subfolders.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Search All Subfolders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this radio button to search the current folder and all its subfolders.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find to search for one or more objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Locate to display a notebook page with tabs that enables you to choose a
folder or object from which you want to start searching.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Help for Find Results ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This folder contains the objects found in a search using the Find choice on a
pop-up menu.  Each time you use the Find choice, a Find Results folder
containing the found objects is created and opened automatically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Help for Find Results ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window contains the objects that you have searched for by selecting the
Find push button on the Background, General, or Program pages of the Settings
notebook.  Select the object that you want and then select Ok.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate - Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the pages of this notebook, you can locate the selected object in an
opened folder, in a related folder, on the Desktop folder, or on a particular
drive.

To locate the selected object in a folder on the desktop:

 1. Select a folder icon where you want to search, or expand the collapsed view
    of the contents of a folder by selecting the plus sign next to the folder;
    then select the folder you want.
 2. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate - Opened Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate an object in an opened folder:

 1. Type a name for the object.
 2. Select a folder icon where you want to search.
 3. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate - Related Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate the selected object in a related folder (near its current tree
position):

 1. Type a name for the object.
 2. Select a folder icon where you want to search for the object.  (Expand or
    collapse the view by selecting the plus or minus sign next to a folder.)
 3. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate - Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate the selected object on a particular drive or folder on a drive
object:

 1. Select a drive icon where you want to search, or expand the collapsed view
    of the contents of the drive by selecting the plus sign next to the drive
    object; then select the folder you want.
 2. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Locate - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate the selected object in a particular directory:

 1. Type a name for the object.
 2. Type the path of the folder you want to search.
 3. Select OK.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o OK
o Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Find: Page 2 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to add, change, or delete file criteria.  You can view the
current criteria in the File system criteria field.

To add or change criteria, select the Add or Change push button to display a
window that enables you to carry out the desired action.  To delete criteria,
select the Delete push button that automatically removes any selected criteria.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o File system criteria
o Add
o Change
o Delete
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Help for extended attributes
o Help for flag settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Include: Page 1 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Type the name of the object you want to include in the open views of the
    folder contents.  You can use an asterisk (*), a global file-name
    character, to represent any character.
 2. Select an object type from the list.

Select the arrow at the bottom right of the window to see page 2.

On page 2, you can specify file criteria for file system objects that you want
to include.  You can choose to include objects using file attributes such as
flags, creation date, size, and others as criteria.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Name
o Type
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Help for extended attributes
o Help for flag settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Include: Page 2 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to add, change, or delete file criteria.  You can view the
current criteria in the File system criteria field.

To add or change criteria, select the Add or Change push button to display a
window that enables you to carry out the desired action.  To delete criteria,
select the Delete push button that automatically removes any selected criteria.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o File system criteria
o Add
o Change
o Delete
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Help for extended attributes
o Help for flag settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field is used to identify the name of objects you want to include with
the open view of the folder contents. You can include an asterisk (*), a global
file-name character, to represent any character or characters in the name.  For
example, if you type

clock*

you include all the selected object types that have clock as the first five
letters of their name.

Related Information:

Global file-name characters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the object types that you can specify to include with the
open folder objects to be viewed.  For example, if you want to include only
data files, select Data file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File System Criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to view the criteria for file system objects that are currently
specified to be included in a search or view of folder contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to display the Add Criteria window where you can specify criteria to
be added for file system objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change to display the Change Criteria window where you can specify
criteria to be changed for file system objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to remove criteria that you have selected from the File system
criteria field.  If you have removed all criteria or have not specified any
criteria to be included, a message is displayed in this field indicating that
no criteria are currently defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add Criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add file system object criteria:

 1. Select Add to display the Add Criteria window.
 2. Select an attribute in the Attribute to be compared list.
 3. Select a comparison type from the Comparison type list.
 4. Select a comparison value from the Comparison value list.
 5. Select a radio button in the Use of criteria field.
 6. Select Add.

For example, if you want to include all data files that were created before
January 1, 1992, you would do the following:

 1. Select Add to display the Add Criteria window.
 2. Select Creation date from the Attribute to be compared list.
 3. Select less than from the Comparison type list.
 4. Select the arrows on the Year, Month, and Day spin buttons until the date
    you want is displayed.
 5. Select the And radio button to indicate that files in the search must have
    these criteria.
 6. Select Add.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Criteria
o Use of criteria
o Add
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Help for extended attributes
o Help for flag settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the criteria you want to add or change for file system
objects.

o Select a file object attribute from the Attribute to be compared list.
o Select the arrow to the right of Comparison type to display a list of
  comparison types.  The possible comparisons are equal to, greater or equal,
  greater than, less or equal, and less than.
o Select a comparison value by using the spin buttons to display the exact
  value you want.  For example, the date and time can be set by selecting the
  spin buttons until the desired date or time is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Use of Criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to specify if some or all of the specified criteria must be true
for file system objects to be found or included.

o Select the And radio button if objects must have all the specified criteria
  to be included.
o Select the Or radio button if objects do not need to have all the specified
  criteria to be included.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add to display the criteria that you have added in the File system
criteria field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change to display the criteria that you have changed in the File system
criteria field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Change Criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change file system object criteria, do the following:

 1. Select the criteria that you want to change in the File system criteria
    field.
 2. Select Change to display the Change Criteria window.
 3. Select an attribute in the Attribute to be compared list.
 4. Select a comparison type from the Comparison type list.
 5. Select a comparison value from the Comparison value list.
 6. Select a radio button in the Use of criteria field.
 7. Select Change.

For example, if you want to change the criteria for all data files from those
created before January 1, 1992, to those accessed after that date, you would do
the following:

 1. Select the criteria that you want to change in the File system criteria
    field.
 2. Select Change to display the Change Criteria window.
 3. Select Last access date from the Attribute to be compared list.
 4. Select greater than from the Comparison type list.
 5. Select the arrows on the Year, Month, and Day spin buttons until the date
    you want is displayed.
 6. Select the And radio button to indicate that files in the search must have
    these criteria.
 7. Select Change.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Criteria
o Use of criteria
o Change
o Cancel

Related Information:

o Help for extended attributes
o Help for flag settings
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Screen: Page 1 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to select a screen resolution for your XGA display adapter.
The resolutions supported by your display adapter are listed in the Screen
Resolution field.  The current resolution is selected.  If you want to change
the resolution, do the following:

 1. Select the resolution you want in the Screen Resolution field.
 2. Restart your system to put the resolution you selected into effect.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Screen resolution
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation
o Changing display adapter support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Screen Resolution ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select a screen resolution for your XGA display adapter.  The
resolutions that are supported by your adapter are listed and the current one
is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Screen: Page 2 of 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to select the display type to be associated with each XGA
adapter attached to the system and also to select the adapter to be used by the
system at startup.  The number of rows displayed in this window corresponds to
the number of XGA adapters installed on the system.

Note:   Be sure to select the correct display type to avoid problems with
        displaying the OS/2 desktop when you restart the system.  For more
        information about a wrong display type choice, select "Correcting
        display type choices" in the "Related Information" section below.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Startup slot
o Display type
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Correcting display type choices
o Changing display adapter support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Correcting Display Type Choices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you select an incorrect display type for the display that is attached to
your XGA adapter, do the following to undo the display type selection and
restore the desktop to its normal appearance:

 1. Start an OS/2 or DOS session by starting the system from drive A.
 2. Change the directory to the \XGA$DMQS subdirectory usually located on the
    drive where OS/2 2.1 is started.  If this subdirectory is located on a
    different drive, it will be specified by the following statement in the
    CONFIG.SYS file:

        DMQSPATH=F:\XGA$DMQS

    where F is the drive name.


 3. Delete the file named XGASETUP.PRO.
 4. After you have deleted this file, restart the system.  The display attached
    to your XGA adapter will be enabled according to the system default type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Startup Slot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Startup slot radio button next to the display type that the system
is to use when it is started.  Only one radio button can be selected at a time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Display Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the type of display from the list of available display
types for each of the display adapters on the system.  The number of rows in
this field corresponds to the number of XGA adapters installed on the system
(from 1 to 8).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View: Page 1 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to view or change folder properties.

Use the fields in Icon view to select how you want icons to be displayed.  Use
the Format field to select the positioning of icons on the desktop or in the
open folder window.

Use the Icon display field to select the size of the icons, or to make them
invisible.  Use the Font field to select a font for the icon names, and to see
a sample of the selected font.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Format
o Icon display
o Font
o Undo
o Default

Select the right arrow at the bottom of the window to see page 2.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View: Page 2 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in Tree view to select how the directory tree structure for this
folder is to be displayed.  Use the Format field to specify if you want lines
showing the connections (branches) between this folder, any other folders it
might contain, and files.

Use the Icon display field to select the size of the icons that represent the
folders and files, or to make the icons invisible.  Use the Font field to
select a font for the icon names, and to see a sample of the selected font.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Format
o Icon display
o Font
o Undo
o Default

Select the left or right arrow at the bottom of the window to see page 1 or
page 3.

Related Information:

o Viewing notebook pages
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for View: Page 3 of 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the fields in Details view to display categories of detailed information
for the currently selected object type.

 1. Select an object type.
 2. Select each category of detailed information in the Details to display
    field.
 3. If you want to change the font, select the Change font push button.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Object type
o Details to display
o Undo
o Default

Select the left arrow at the bottom of the window to see page 2 or page 1.

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Format (Icon) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the way you want icons displayed.  Select the radio
button next to the choice that describes the way you want the icons arranged:

o Select Flowed if you want the icons arranged in columns across the screen.
o Select Non-flowed if you want the icons arranged in a column from the top of
  the screen to the bottom.
o Select Non-grid if you want the icons located randomly about the screen
  without any ordered arrangement.  This is the default setting.

If you select Flowed or Non-flowed, a single horizontal line is displayed after
each icon if you drag an icon along a column.  The line indicates where you can
place the icon that you are dragging.  The icon will be displayed there when
you drop it by releasing mouse button 2.

Related Information:

Dragging an Object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Icon Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the size of the icons and specify if you want them or
not.  Select the radio button next to the choice that describes what you want
for the icons.

o Select Normal size if you want the icons to appear as the default size.
o Select Small size if you want the icons to be smaller than the default size.
o Select Invisible if you do not want icons to be displayed on the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change font if you want to change the fonts to be used for the icons,
tree objects, or any of the objects in the Details view.  You can view the
current font for all the View objects in the Font field.  When you select
Change font, the Font Settings window is displayed.

Font selection is related to the icon display selection.  This means that you
can have a different font preserved for each icon display type, that is, normal
size, small size, and no icons.  The font sample will be updated when you make
a change to the icon display type.

Related Information:

Changing, adding, and deleting fonts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Format (Tree) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this field to select the way you want the tree structure displayed. Select
the radio button next to the choice that describes the way you want the tree
structure arranged:

o Select Lines if you want the tree structure displayed with connecting lines.
o Select No lines if you want the tree structure displayed without connecting
  lines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the object types that are currently in the folder.  Select
one object for which you want to view the details.  When you specify an object
type, the details of that object type are displayed in the Details to display
list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Details to Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the displayable details for the currently-selected object
type.  You can select several topics from the list of details for the selected
object type.  For example, if you want to display the size, last access date,
and flags for a file, you can select all of these from this list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to determine the contents of the Sort pop-up menu.  You
determine how you want objects in folders sorted by selecting items on that
pop-up menu.

You can select items that you want to appear on the Sort pop-up menu by
selecting them from the list boxes in this window.

Using the Sort pop-up menu, you can specify objects to be sorted by name or by
object type.  You can also specify specific attributes by which folder objects
of that type can be sorted.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Object type
o Sort by attribute
o Default sort attribute
o Always maintain sort order
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Always Maintain Sort Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this check box if you want the objects in the folder sorted each time
you open it.  If you add an object to a folder, it will also be sorted as it is
added.  The folder might take longer to open if you select this option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the object types that can be sorted.  Select an object type
to be sorted.  When you specify an object type to be sorted, the specific
attributes of that object type are displayed in the Sort by attribute list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sort by Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains the attributes for the current selected object type.  Select
the attributes that you want to add to the list of attributes on the Sort
pop-up menu.  You specify the attributes by which a folder is to be sorted by
selecting them on the pop-up menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Default Sort Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrow to the right of this list box to display the attributes that
you want to be selected as the sort default on the Sort pop-up menu.  Objects
are sorted in ascending order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Help for System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use System to change system defaults.  You can use System to determine the
following:

o How to resolve object title conflicts during create, copy, or move actions
o The way windows are displayed, hidden, or minimized
o The timing and existence of logos
o The desirability of message confirmation for object and folder deletions
o The screen resolution for your display adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Help for Start Here ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Start Here to obtain information about how to get started and become
productive quickly and easily with OS/2 2.1.  Start Here contains information
about installing your programs, customizing your desktop, printing, and other
items that will enable you to use the operating system to do a wide variety of
computer tasks.

It also describes each oject on the desktop and provides information about
multimedia capabilities and the many new features of OS/2 2.1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Help for Minimized Window Viewer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Minimized Window Viewer contains the icons of windows that have been
minimized.  Minimized program objects are displayed in the Viewer by default
but system objects are hidden (displayed) as names in the Window List by
default.

Programs that update information such as Communications Manager can continue to
run while minimized in the Viewer but do not work when displayed (hidden) as
names in the Window List.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Help for Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Contents to display the icons of all windows that have been minimized and
are contained in the Minimized Window Viewer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Help for OS/2 System Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use OS/2 System Editor to create and edit text files.  When you select OS/2
System Editor, the System Editor window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the system defaults that determine how objects and programs are
displayed as windows, and if they are to be minimized or hidden.

Use the Animation field to turn window animation on or off.  Window animation
means that windows are displayed with a gradual graphic effect.

Use the Object open behavior field to specify how you want to display the
window when you select an object that is already open.

Use the Button appearance for windows field to determine the existence of a
hide button or minimize button on a window.

Use the Minimize button behavior field to specify where you want minimized
windows to be placed, in the Minimized Window Viewer or on the desktop.

o Select Hide window to make windows invisible on the desktop and have the name
  of the window displayed in the Window List.  This is the default for system
  objects such as folders, palettes and drives.
o Select Minimize window to viewer to cause the icons of all minimized windows
  to be placed in the Minimized Window Viewer.  This is the default for program
  windows that are minimized.
o Select Minimize window to desktop to cause the icons of all minimized windows
  to be displayed on the desktop.

Note:   All windows that are hidden or minimized are always displayed as names
        in the Window List as long as they are active.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Animation
o Button appearance for windows
o Minimize button behavior
o Object open behavior
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

o Displaying window list
o Restoring a minimized object
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Animation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Enabled to turn animation for displaying windows on.  This is the
default setting.

Select Disabled to turn animation for displaying windows off.

When animation is enabled, windows are displayed with a gradual graphic effect.
When animation is disabled, windows are displayed without this effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Button Appearance for Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is only functional for system objects such as folders, palettes, and
drives.

o When Minimize button is selected, open windows of system objects such as
  folders, palettes, and drives display the minimize button on the title bar.
  This means that these objects can be minimized and placed in the Minimized
  Window Viewer or on the desktop.
o When Hide button is selected, open windows of system objects such as folders,
  palettes, and drives display the hide button on the title bar.  This means
  that these objects have their names and views placed in the Window List when
  they are hidden.  This is the default setting for system objects such as
  folders, palettes, and drives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Minimize Button Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

o Select Hide window to have windows displayed as names in the Window List when
  you select the hide button.  This is the default for system objects such as
  folders, palettes, and drives.
o Select Minimize window to viewer to cause the icons of all minimized windows
  to be displayed in the Minimized Window Viewer.  The Minimized Window Viewer
  object opens to a standard window containing the icons of all currently
  minimized windows.  This is the default for program windows that are
  minimized.

  Note:   Programs that update information such as Communications Manager can
          continue to run while minimized in the Viewer as well as when
          minimized to the desktop.  They do not work when hidden (displayed)
          as names in the Window List.


o Select Minimize window to desktop to have the icons of minimized windows
  displayed on the desktop.

Related Information:

Restoring a minimized object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Object Open Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Display existing window to display the same window when you select an
object that is already open.

Select Create new window to display a new window each time you select an object
that is already open.  This means that you can have several versions of the
same object open at the same time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Logo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to specify how logos are to be displayed.

o Select the indefinite radio button if you want logos to be displayed until
  you remove them.
o Select the None radio button if you want no logos to be displayed.
o Select the Timed radio button if you want logos to be displayed a specific
  amount of time.  When you make this selection, you specify the amount of time
  by pressing and holding down mouse button 1 on the arrows to the right of the
  Seconds and tenths spin buttons until the time you want is displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Indefinite
o None
o Timed
o Seconds
o Tenths
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Indefinite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Indefinite if you want logos to be displayed until you remove them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for None ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select None if you want no logos to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Timed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Timed if you want logos to be displayed for a specific amount of time.
When you make this selection, you specify the amount of time you want by using
the Seconds and Tenths spin buttons on the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Seconds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to the right of this spin button to change the time logos are
displayed in seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Tenths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the arrows to the right of this spin button to change the time logos are
displayed in tenths of seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirmations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each
time you perform one of the actions indicated in the window.  Select the check
box next to the confirmation message you want displayed.  Deselect the check
box next to any confirmation message you do not want displayed.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Confirm on folder delete
o Confirm on delete
o Confirm on rename of files with extensions
o Confirm on copy, move, create shadow
o Display progress indication window
o Undo
o Default

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Folder Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Confirm on folder delete to have a confirmation message displayed each
time you delete a folder.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Confirm on delete to have a confirmation message displayed each time you
delete an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Rename of Files with Extensions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When this checkbox is selected, a warning message is displayed if you try to
rename a data file in a manner in which the extension is changed or removed.
The message indicates that renaming the data file might prevent it from being
recognized by the program running it if the extension is not kept.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Confirm on Copy, Move, Create Shadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you select this checkbox, a window is displayed that enables you to start
a copy, move, or create shadow process.  The default is off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Display Progress Indication Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When this checkbox is selected, a window is displayed with a Pause pushbutton
that enables you to control the progress of the copy, move, or create shadow
process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts
during Create, Copy, or Move actions.

For a detailed explanation of each field, select from the list below:

o Title clash
o Undo

Related Information:

Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Title Clash ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Do one of the following to specify system response if you create, copy, or
move, an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:

o Select Prompt for appropriate action to have the system display a message
  with choices to determine system behavior for dealing with object title
  conflicts.
o Select Auto-rename object to have the system rename the new object by adding
  a colon and a number next to the original name.  For example, the duplicate
  object, Data File, would be renamed Data File:1.
o Select Replace existing object to have the system replace the existing object
  with the new one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Help for REXX Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use REXX Information to learn about the programming language called REXX (OS/2
Procedures Language 2/REXX) that is a high quality programming language using
common English words that both beginning and experienced programmers can
understand.  You can use REXX to write simple batch programs or more advanced
applications for use in OS/2 or other system environments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. Help for the Command Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the OS/2 Command Reference for information about OS/2 and DOS commands and
their usage in the command line environment of the operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Flag Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Flags are attributes of objects.  You can select one or more of the check boxes
to indicate that you want to find or view objects that have specific flags.

Read-only
               The object can be read but not changed.

Archive
               The BACKUP, RESTORE, COPY, and XCOPY commands work on the
               object.

               For more information about these commands, refer to the OS/2
               Command Reference.

Hidden
               The object cannot be displayed in a Tree view.

System
               The object is part of the operating system.

Related Information:

o Using commands
o Opening a folder
o Finding an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An extended attribute is additional information that the operating system or a
program associates with a file object.  The system or program uses the
information to recognize the object.

You can use one or more extended attributes when you want to find or view
objects that have specific extended attributes.

Extended attributes include the following:

Comments
               Any notes about the object.

Key phrases
               Words that identify the object.

History
               The record of an object as provided by the operating system or
               program.

Subject
               A summary of the contents of the object.

Date information
               The dates and times the object was created, last changed, and
               last accessed.

Size
               The number of bytes the object has.  The number of bytes for all
               the extended attributes.  Or the number of objects in a folder
               and the total number of bytes for all of them.

Related Information:

o Files with extended attributes
o Opening a folder
o Finding an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Help for Power ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Power to set features that manage and track power consumption in
battery-powered computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM)
standard.

The APM standard defines the way hardware and software work together to provide
features that reduce power consumption and help extend battery life.

Note:   The power management feature is not available if you installed it using
        Selective Install and your computer does not have APM BIOS.

Power management features include:

o A choice that sets power management support to On or Off

o Status windows that show you the power level of the battery in your computer
  and the state of the battery charge

o A choice that automatically updates the status window at intervals you select

o A choice that conserves power by using partial power levels

To set the features, first display the Power object pop-up menu.  Select Open
and then Settings to display the Power - Settings window.  Select the Power
page to set power management support to On or Off.  Select the View page to set
which status window is displayed and set how the status window is refreshed (or
updated).

Select Open and then Full status to display the Power - Status window.  Select
Open and then Battery status to display the Battery - Status window.

Select Suspend to set a mode that uses partial power levels to conserve power.
For information about the suspend mode, select a topic from the list below.

For additional help, select the Help push button after windows are displayed.

Related Information:

o Suspend
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Help for Suspend ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the suspend mode to conserve battery power.  The suspend mode allows you to
conserve as much power as possible without turning off the computer.

When you select Suspend, the system dims the display and turns off devices that
are not in use.  The system conserves battery power by putting itself into a
dormant state.

To exit suspend mode and resume operation of your system, you need to use the
features of your computer.

Some computers have a resume key that you press to exit suspend mode.  Other
computers enter suspend mode when the computer lid is closed and exit suspend
mode after the lid is opened.  Refer to the documentation that came with your
computer for information about its suspend mode features.

After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you can
resume operation of your system.  This delay might be a few seconds, depending
on your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Help for Power ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to set power management features to On or Off.  If you set
power management features to On, your computer and software operate in a way
that reduces power consumption and tracks power status.

For an explanation of each choice, select a topic from the list below:

o Power management
o Confirm on power state changes
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Help for Power Management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the radio buttons to set power management to On or Off.  If you select On,
your computer and software operate in a way that reduces power consumption and
tracks power status.

If you select Off, you cannot use power management features such as suspend, or
the Power - Status and Battery - Status windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Help for Confirm on Power State Changes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select or deselect the check box beside Confirm on power state changes.  If you
select this choice, the system displays a window and requires you to select Yes
before you can start the suspend mode. For information about the suspend mode,
select the topic from the list below.

Related Information:

Suspend


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Help for View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this window to set which status window is displayed and how the status
window is refreshed.  You can select settings that automatically refresh (or
update) the Power - Status or Battery - Status window, or you can periodically
update the status window to its current status yourself.

For an explanation of each choice, select a topic from the list below.

o Default status view
o Refresh
o Undo
o Default


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Help for Default Status View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the radio buttons to select which status window is displayed.  If you
select Full status, the Power - Status window is displayed.  If you select
Battery only, the Battery - Status window is displayed.

For information about the status windows, select a topic from the list below.

Related Information:

o Power - Status window
o Battery - Status window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the radio buttons to set refresh features to On or Off.  If you select On,
the system automatically updates the Power - Status or Battery - Status window
at intervals you specify.

If you select Off, the system does not automatically update the status window
to its current status.

You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the status
window pop-up menu.  For information about Refresh Now, select the topic from
the list below.

Use the Refresh rate spin button to set a refresh interval.  You can select
intervals of 1 to 30 minutes.

If refresh features are set to On, the system automatically updates the
information in the status window at the interval you set.  For example, if you
set a 3-minute refresh interval, the system will update the window every 3
minutes.

Related Information:

Refresh Now


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. Help for Power - Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Power - Status window shows the:

o Power level of the battery compared to its capacity
o Power source for the computer
o Charge state of the battery

Note:   You cannot change the size of the Power - Status window.

For an explanation of the window information, select a topic from the list
below.

The Power - Status window pop-up menu allows you to:

o Set refresh features to On if you want the system to automatically update the
  Power - Status window, or set refresh features to Off if you prefer to update
  the window yourself

o Select Refresh Now to update the information in the status window to its
  current status

o Start the suspend mode, which uses partial power levels to conserve power

For an explanation of pop-up menu choices, select a topic from the list below.
To display the pop-up menu, click mouse button 1 or 2 on the Power - Status
window title-bar icon.

Related Information:

o Battery life
o Power source
o Battery state
o Refresh
o Refresh Now
o Suspend


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Help for Power Source ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system displays power source information as "Battery Powered" (operating
with a battery pack) or "AC Powered" (operating with electric current).  If the
system cannot determine the power source, power source information is not
displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. Help for Battery Life ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system displays battery life information as a battery and power gauge
graphic.  The power gauge shows the power level of the battery compared to the
capacity of the battery.

The shaded area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery power level
increases or decreases.

When the shaded area of the gauge is at the top of the scale (100 percent), the
battery is at full power.  When the shaded area of the gauge is at the bottom
of the scale (0 percent), the battery is out of power.  When the shaded area is
dimmed, there is no battery in the computer or the computer cannot provide
battery power information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Help for Battery State ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system displays battery state information as:

"High"
            Battery charge is OK and you can continue using your system
"Low"
            Battery charge is reduced and you need to prepare to recharge the
            battery or switch to another power source
"Critical"
            Battery charge is depleted and you need to recharge the battery or
            switch to another power source
"Charging"
            System is restoring the battery charge
"Unknown"
            System cannot determine the battery state

Warning:  A "Critical" battery state could cause system failures or data loss.

The system displays "Unknown" if it cannot determine the type of battery in
your computer or if there is no battery in your computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Help for Battery - Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Battery - Status window is a small window that shows battery life
information.  The system displays the information as a battery and power gauge
graphic.  The power gauge shows the power level of the battery compared to the
capacity of the battery.

The Battery - Status window pop-up menu allows you to:

o Set refresh features to On if you want the system to automatically update the
  Battery - Status window, or set refresh features to Off if you prefer to
  update the window yourself

o Select Refresh Now to update the information in the window to its current
  status

o Start the suspend mode, which uses partial power levels to conserve power

For an explanation of pop-up menu choices, select a topic from the list below.
To display the pop-up menu, click mouse button 1 or 2 on the Battery - Status
window title-bar icon.

Related Information:

o Refresh
o Refresh Now
o Suspend


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Help for Full Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Full status to display the Power - Status window.  The Power - Status
window displays information about the:

o Computer power source
o Battery power level
o Battery charge state

For an explanation of the Power - Status window, select the topic from the list
below.

Related Information:

Power - Status window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Help for Battery Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Battery status to display the Battery - Status window.  The Battery -
Status window displays information about the battery power level.

For an explanation of the Battery - Status window, select the topic from the
list below.

Related Information:

Battery - Status window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Help for Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Refresh to set how the system updates the Power - Status or Battery -
Status windows.  If you set refresh features to On, the system automatically
updates the status window at intervals you specify.

Use the View page of the notebook to set the refresh interval.  You can also
use the View page to set refresh features.  Set refresh features to On or Off
using the radio buttons.  Set the interval using the refresh rate spin button.
You can specify refresh intervals of 1 to 30 minutes.

If you set refresh features to Off, the system does not automatically update
the status window to its current status.

Related Information:

Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Help for Refresh Now ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Refresh Now to update the information displayed in the Power - Status or
Battery - Status window.

Select Refresh Now from the Power - Status or Battery - Status window pop-up
menu.  To display the pop-up menu, click mouse button 1 or 2 on the status
window title-bar icon.

Note:   You can select Refresh Now only when the status window is open.

Related Information:

o Power - Status window
o Battery - Status window